THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
By the same Author. 
 THE REFRACTION OF THE EYE. 
 
 Eighth Edition, with 100 illustrations, crown 8vo., Qs. 
 
THE 
 
 OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 A MANUAL FOR STUDENTS 
 
 BY 
 
 aiTSTAVTJS HARTRIDaE, F.R.C.S. 
 
 SURGEON TO TUE HOVAL WKSTMIXSTKR OFHTUALMIC UdSPITAL; OPHTHALMIC SfllGEOX AND 
 
 LECTURER ON OPUTUAl.MIC SL'KGKRY TO THK WESTMINSTER HOSPITAL; OPHTHALMIC 
 
 3UBGEO.N TO ST. BARTHOLOMEW'S HOSPITAL, CHATHAM; COXSfLTIXG 
 
 OPHTHALMIC SURGEON TO ST. GEOUGK's DISPENSARY, 
 
 HANOVF.R sqUABK, ETC. 
 
 WITH SIXTY.EIGHI ILLUSTR.\.TI0X3 AND FOUR PLA.TES 
 THIRD EDITION 
 
 LONDON 
 
 J. & A. CHURCHILL 
 
 7, GREAT MARLBOROUGH STRKET 
 1897 
 

 OPTO- -TRY 
 UB.xARY 
 
 PREFACE TO THIRD EDITION 
 
 In preparing a third edition of ' The Ophthalmo- 
 scope ^ for the press_, every page has been carefully 
 revised^ and a few additions made which will, I 
 trust, enhance the value of the book as a guide to 
 ophthalmoscopic work. 
 
 G. H. 
 
 12, WlMPOLE StEEET, \V.; 
 
 Jul I/, 1897. 
 
 M675i:i8 
 
PREFACE 
 
 The subject of this volume is one that has made 
 great progress during the last few years, not only in 
 the mechanism of the instrument, but also in the 
 methods of using it to the best advantage. In the 
 present day the ophthalmoscope is almost as neces- 
 sary to the physician as it is to the ophthalmic sur- 
 geon, since many serious general diseases may first 
 be detected by changes taking place in the fundus, 
 frequently without any subjective symptoms; thus 
 the importance and usefulness of the instrument is 
 greatly extended. 
 
 In introducing this small work to the profession, I 
 do so in the hope that it may be found useful not 
 only to the ophthalmic students who, in London and 
 other large medical schools, have the advantage of 
 practical demonstrations on the subject, but also to 
 the large class of practitioners whose opportunities of 
 seeing cases are few and far between, and who may 
 desire to learn the use of the ophthalmoscope when 
 practical instruction is out of their reach. 
 
Vlll PHEFACK 
 
 While hoping that the description given will be 
 found sufficiently clear and elementary to enable the 
 most inexperienced to understand it^ I trust that 
 even the advanced student may find some help and 
 instruction. 
 
 The arrangement of the book is simple and syste- 
 matic, and an endeavour has been made to keep it 
 small, so that it may be conveniently carried in the 
 pocket for reference in the out-patient room ; and 
 this, perhaps, constitutes one of its chief advantages. 
 The work is profusely illustrated with woodcuts — a 
 matter of some importance, as it is almost impossible 
 to make the subject clear without them, especially to 
 those of my readers who may not have access to an 
 instructor ; illustrations, although in many instances 
 conveying only a somewhat imperfect idea, certainly 
 impress the subject on the studeut^s mind. A slight 
 knowledge of optics is essential, and therefore the 
 first chapter from my work on the ' Refraction of the 
 Eye ^ is reproduced, and several of the woodcuts 
 from that book are doing duty again. 
 
 a. H. 
 
 65, Geeen Street, Park Lane, W.; 
 August, 1891. 
 
] I ^-pvy nf the Alame(Ta 
 ^i optometrists 
 
 CONTENTS 
 
 CHAPTER I 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Optical Principles involved in the Use of the 
 
 Ophthalmoscope . . . . 1 
 
 CHAPTER II 
 The Ophthalmoscope . . . .21 
 
 CHAPTER III 
 Methods of Examination . . .32 
 
 CHAPTER IV 
 The Appearances of the Normal Fundus . 81 
 
 CHAPTER V 
 
 The Cornea, Anterior Chamber, Iris, and Lens . 92 
 
 h 
 
CONTENTS 
 
 CHAPTER VI 
 
 PAGE 
 
 The Vitreous . . . .99 
 
 CHAPTER VII 
 The Choroid ..... 105 
 
 CHAPTER VIII 
 The Retina . . . . .116 
 
 CHAPTER IX 
 The Optic Nerve .... 136 
 
 Appendix . . . . .151 
 
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS 
 
 No. PAGE 
 
 1. Reflection by a plane surface . . . .2 
 
 2. Virtual image formed by a plane mirror . . 3 
 'S. Reflection by a concave surface . . .4 
 
 4. Ditto ditto . . . .5 
 
 5. Reflection by a convex surface . . .6 
 
 6. Refraction by a plane surface . . .7 
 
 7. Refraction by a prism . . .8 
 
 8. Ditto ditto . . . .8 
 
 9. Refraction by a spherical surface . . 9 
 
 10. Ditto ditto . .10 
 
 11. Formation of a convex lens . . . .11 
 
 12. Different forms of lenses . . . .12 
 
 13. Refraction of secondary axes by a biconvex lens . . 12 
 
 14. Refraction of parallel rays by a convex lens . . 13 
 
 15. Ditto ditto . . .14 
 
 16. Properties of a biconvex lens . . . .14 
 
 17. Ditto ditto . . . .15 
 
 18. Properties of a biconcave lens . , .16 
 
 19. Refraction of parallel rays by a concave lens . . 16 
 
 20. Formation of an inverted image . . .17 
 
 21. Real inverted image formed by a convex lens . . 18 
 
 22. Virtual image formed by a convex lens , . .19 
 
 23. Virtual image formed by a concave lens . . 19 
 
 24. Light entering the eye and returning by tlie same path . 21 
 
xu 
 
 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS 
 
 No. 
 
 25. Light returning from hypermetropic eye 
 
 20. Liglit returning from inyo})ic eye 
 
 27. Hehnholtz's first ophthalmoscope 
 
 28. Tlie ophthalmoscope 
 
 29. Morton's refracting ophthalmoscope 
 
 30. Concave mirror for retinoscopy 
 
 31. Frost's artificial eye 
 
 32. The ohlique illumination 
 
 33. Oblique illumination with magnifying glass 
 
 34. Rays coming from emmetropic eye 
 
 35. Rays coming from hypermetropic eye . 
 30. Rays coming from myopic eye 
 
 37. Position for the indirect examination . 
 
 38. Formation of image in indii*ect examination 
 
 39. Indirect examination in emmetropia 
 
 40. Indirect examination in hypermetropia . 
 
 41. Indirect examination in myopia 
 
 42. Size of the image in emmetropia 
 
 43. Size of the image in hypermetropia 
 
 44. Size of the image in hypermetropia 
 
 45. Diagram showing the real size^of the disc and 
 
 the images in the indirect and direct methods 
 
 46. Position for the direct examination 
 
 47. Formation of image in direct examination 
 
 48. Size of image on retina in emmetropia . 
 
 49. Determination of size of image by coin . 
 
 50. Method of estimating enlargement 
 
 51. Direct examination in emmetropia 
 
 52. Direct examination in hypermetropia . 
 
 53. Direct examination in myopia 
 
 54. Method of retinoscopy 
 
 55. Shadow in retinoscopy 
 
 56. Movement of shadow 
 
 57. Formation of image in myopia 
 
 58. Formation of image in hypermetropia . 
 
 59. Oblique shadows 
 
 60. Method of recording the chief meridians 
 
 61. Diagram of the normal disc and nerve . 
 
 PAGE 
 
 22 
 23 
 24 
 25 
 29 
 31 
 34 
 30 
 37 
 38 
 39 
 39 
 42 
 43 
 46 
 46 
 47 
 48 
 48 
 49 
 
 the size of 
 
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS 
 
 xni 
 
 No. 
 
 62. Position of opacities 
 
 63. Movements of vitreous opacit 
 
 64. Physiological cup 
 
 65. Atrophic cup 
 
 66. Glaucoma cup 
 
 67. Parallax . 
 
 68. Papillitis . 
 
 es 
 
 PAGE 
 
 97 
 102 
 140 
 141 
 142 
 143 
 145 
 
 Coloured Plates (between pages 82 and 83) : 
 
 I. — Fig. 1. Fundus of a child of medium complexion. 
 Left eye. Direct. 
 Fig. 2. Albino. Right eye. Indirect. 
 II. — Fig. 1. Dark fundus. Left eye. Direct. 
 
 Fig. 2. Choroid tigre. Right eye. Indirect. 
 III. — Fig. 1. Choroiditis in the exudative stage' 
 
 Fie:. 2. Disseminated choroiditis . ( opposite 
 
 Fig. 3. Senile choroidal change 
 Fig. 4. Coloboma of the choroid 
 IV. — Fig. 1. Retinitis pigmentosa . 
 Fig. 2. Thrombosis of central vein 
 Fig. 3. Atrophy of the optic disc 
 Fig. 4. Albuminuric retinitis . 
 
 page 106 
 
 opposite 
 page 118 
 
THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 CHAPTER I 
 
 OPTICAL PRINCIPLES INVOLVED IN THE USE OF THE 
 OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 Light is propagated from a luminous point in every 
 plane and in all directions in straight lines ; these 
 lines of direction are called rays. Rays travel with 
 the same rapidity so long as they remain in the same 
 medium. 
 
 The denser the medium the less rapidly does the 
 ray of light pass through it. 
 
 Rays of light diverge, and the amount of diver- 
 gence is proportionate to the distance of the point 
 from which they come ; the nearer the source of the 
 rays the more they diverge. 
 
 When rays proceed from a distant point such as the 
 sun, it is impossible to show that they are not parallel, 
 and in dealing with rays which enter the eye, it will 
 be sufficiently accurate to assume them to be parallel 
 when they proceed from a point at a greater distance 
 than 6 metres. 
 
 1 
 
)i THE OrHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 A ray of liglit meeting with a body, may be absorbed; 
 reflected ; or if it is able to pass tlirough this body, it 
 may be refracted. 
 
 Reflection 
 
 Reflection by a Plane Surface 
 
 "Reflection takes place from any polished surface, 
 and according to two laws : 
 
 1st. The angle of reflection is equal to the angle 
 of incidence. 
 
 2nd. The reflected and incident rays are both in 
 the same plane, which is perpendicular to the reflect- 
 ing surface. 
 
 Fig. 1. 
 
 Thus, if A B be the ray incident at b, on the mirror 
 c D, and B E the ray reflected, the perpendicular p b, 
 will divide the angle a b e into two equal parts; the 
 angle a b p is equal to the angle p b e ; and A b, p b, 
 and E B lie in the same plane. 
 
 When reflection takes place from a plane surface, 
 the image is projected backwards to a distance behind 
 the mirror, equal to the distance of the object in front 
 of it, the image being of the same size as the object. 
 
 Thus in Fig. 2, the image of the candle c is formed 
 behind the mirror m, at c', a distance behind the 
 
EEFLECTION 
 
 mirror equal to the distance of the candle in front of 
 it, and an observer's eye placed at E would receive 
 the rays from c as if they came from c'. 
 
 Fio. 2. 
 
 M. The mirror, c. The candle, c'. The virtual image of the candle. 
 E. The eye of the observer receiving rays from mirror. 
 
 The image of the candle so formed by a plane 
 mirror is called a virtual image. 
 
 Reflection by a Concave Surface 
 
 A concave surface may be looked upon as made up 
 of a number of planes inclined to each other. 
 
 Parallel rays falling on a concave mirror are 
 reflected as convergent rays, which meet on the axis 
 at a point (f, Fig. 3} called the princijml focus j about 
 equally distant from the mirror and its centre c. The 
 distance of the principal focus from the mirror is 
 called the focal length of the mirror. 
 
4 TIIR OPITTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 If the luminous point be situated at f, then the 
 diverging rays would be reflected as parallel to each 
 other and to the axis. 
 
 If the point is at the centre of the concavity of the 
 mirror (c), the rays return along the same lines, so 
 that the point is its own image. 
 
 If the point be at a the focus will be at a, and it 
 
 Fro. 3. 
 
 will be obvious that if the point be moved to a, its 
 focus will be at A; these two points, therefore, a and 
 a, bear a reciprocal relation to each other, and are 
 called conjugate foci. 
 
 If the luminous point is beyond the centre, its 
 conjugate focus is between the principal focus and 
 the centre. 
 
 If the luminous point is between the principal 
 focus and the centre, then its conjugate is beyond 
 the centre; so that the nearer the luminous point 
 approaches the principal focus, the greater is the 
 distance at which the reflected rays meet. 
 
 If the point be nearer the mirror than (f) the prin- 
 cipal focus, the rays will be reflected as divergent, 
 
RKFLKCTION 
 
 and will therefore never meet; if, however, we con- 
 tinue these diverging rays backwards, they will unite 
 at a point (h) behind the mirror; this point is called 
 
 Fia. 4. 
 
 the virtual focus, and an observer situated in the path 
 of reflected rays will receive them as if they came 
 from this point. 
 
 Thus it follows that — 
 
 Concave mirrors produce two kinds of images or 
 none at all, according to the distance of the object, as 
 may be seen by looking at oneself in a concave mirror. 
 If the mirror be placed nearer than its principal focus, 
 then one sees an enlarged erect virtual image, which 
 increases slightly in size as the mirror is made to 
 recede ; this image becomes confused and disappears 
 as the principal focus of the mirror is reached ; on 
 moving the mirror still further away (that is, 
 beyond its focus) one obtains an enlarged inverted 
 image, which diminishes as the mirror is still further 
 withdrawn. 
 
6 
 
 THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 Reflection hi/ a Coiivejc Surface 
 
 Parallel rays falling on sucli a surface become 
 divergent, hence never meet; but if the diverging 
 rays thus formed are carried backwards by Hups, 
 then an imaginary image is formed which is called 
 negative, and at a point called the principal focus (f). 
 
 Foci of convex mirrors are virtual; and the image, 
 whatever the position of the object, is always virtual, 
 erect, and smaller than the object. 
 
 Fig. 5. 
 
 The radius of the mirror is double the principal focus. 
 
 Refraction 
 
 Refraction hy a Plane Surface 
 
 A ray of light passing through a transparent 
 medium into another of a different density is refracted, 
 unless the ray fall perpendicular to the surface 
 separating' the two media, when it continues its course 
 without undergoing any refraction (Fig. 6, h k). 
 
KE FRACTION 7 
 
 A ray is called incident before passing into the 
 second medium, emergent after it has penetrated it. 
 
 A ray passing from a rarer to a denser medium is 
 refracted towards the perpendicular; as shown in Fig. 
 6, the ray A b is refracted at b, towards the perpen- 
 dicular p p. 
 
 In passing from the denser to the rarer medium the 
 ray is refracted from the perpendicular, b D is refracted 
 at c from p p (Fig. 6). 
 
 Reflection accompanies refraction, the ray dividing 
 itself at the point of incidence into a refracted portion 
 (b c) and a reflected portion (b e). 
 
 FiG.G. 
 
 The amount of refraction is the same for any medium 
 at the same obliquity, and is called the index of 
 refraction ; air is taken as the standard, and is called 
 1 ; the index of refraction of water is 1*3, that of glass 
 1*5. The diamond has almost the highest refractive 
 power of any transparent substance, and has an index 
 
8 
 
 Tiiy OrUTHALMOSCOPli; 
 
 of refraction of 2"4. The cornea has an index of 
 refraction of 1"3 and the lens 1*4. 
 
 The refractive power of a transparent substance is 
 not always in proportion to its density. 
 
 If the sides of the medium are parallel, then all rays 
 except those perpendicular to the surface which pass 
 through without altering their course, are refracted 
 twice, as at b and c (Fig. G), and continue in the same 
 direction after passing through the medium as they 
 had before entering it. 
 
 If the two sides of the refracting medium are not 
 parallel, as in a prism, the rays cannot be perpeudi. 
 cular to more than one surface at a time. 
 
 Therefore every ray falling on a prism must undergo 
 refraction, and the deviation is always towards the 
 base of the prism. 
 
 The rehitive direction of the rays is unaltered 
 (Fig. 7). 
 
 Fig. 7. Fia. 8. 
 
 If D M (Fig. 8) be a ray falling on a prism (a b c) at 
 M, it is bent towards the base of the prism, assuming 
 the direction m n ; on emergence it is again bent at n ; 
 an observer placed at e would receive the ray as if it 
 came from K ; the angle K H D, formed by the two lines 
 
REFRACTION 9 
 
 at H, is called the angle of deviation, and is about half 
 the size of the i^incipal angle formed at A by the two 
 sides of the prism. 
 
 Refraction hy a Spherical Surface 
 
 Parallel rays passing through such a surface, sepa- 
 rating media of different densities, do not continue 
 parallel, but are refracted, so that they meet at a 
 point called the principal focus. 
 
 If parallel rays, k, d, e, fall on a b, a spherical sur- 
 face separating the media M and n, of which n is the 
 denser, ray d, which strikes the surface of A b at right 
 angles, passes through without refraction, and is called 
 the"^ principal axis ; ray k will strike the surface at an 
 
 Fig. 9. 
 
 angle, and will therefore be refracted towards the 
 perpendicular c J, meeting the ray d at F ; ray E will be 
 refracted in the same way, likewise all rays parallel 
 in medium M. The point f where these rays meet is 
 the principal focus, and the distance between the 
 principal focus and the curved surface is spoken of 
 as the principal focal distance. 
 
10 THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 Rays proceeding from f, will be parallel in m after 
 passing throngli the refracting surface. Kays parallel 
 in medium n will focus at f', which is called the 
 anterior focus. 
 
 Had the rays in medium m been more or less diver- 
 gent, they would focus on the principal axis at a 
 greater distance than the principal focus, say at h, and 
 conversely rays coming from h would focus at g ; 
 these two points are then conjugate foci. 
 
 When the divergent rays focus at a point on the 
 axis twice the distance of the principal focus, then its 
 conjugate will be at an equal distance on the other 
 side of the curved surface. 
 
 If rays proceed from a point o, nearer the surface 
 than its principal focus, they will still be divergent 
 after passing through A B, though less so than before. 
 
 Fro. 10. 
 
 and will therefore never meet ; by continuing these 
 rays backwards they will meet at L, so that the conju- 
 gate focus of will be at l, on the same side as the 
 focus ; and the conjugate focus will in this case be 
 spoken of as negative. 
 
LENSES 11 
 
 Refraction hy Lenses 
 
 Refraction by lenses is somewhat more complicated. 
 
 A lens is an optical contrivance usually made of 
 
 glass, and consists of a refracting medium with two 
 
 Fio. 11. 
 
 opposite surfaces, one or both of which may be 
 segments of a sphere ; they are then called spherical 
 lenses, of which there are six varieties : 
 
 1. Plano-convex, the segments of one sphere (Fig. 
 11 b). 
 
 2. Biconvex, segments of two spheres (Fig. 11, a). 
 
 3. Converging concavo-convex, also called a con- 
 verging meniscus. 
 
 4. Plano-concave. 
 
 5. Biconcave. 
 
 6. Diverging concavo-convex, called also a diverg- 
 ing meniscus. 
 
 Lenses may be looked upon as made up of a number 
 of prisms with different refracting angles — convex 
 lenses, of prisms placed with their bases together, 
 concave lenses, of prisms with their edges together. 
 
 A ray passing from a less refracting medium (as 
 air) through a lens, is deviated towards the thickest 
 part, therefore the first three lenses, which are 
 
12 
 
 THK OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 thickest at the centre, are called converging j and the 
 others, which are thickest at the borders, diverging. 
 
 Fio. 12. 
 
 A line passing througli the centre of the lens (called 
 the optical centre) at right angles to the surfaces of 
 the lens is termed the principal accis, and any ray 
 passing through that axis is not refracted. 
 
 All other rays undergo more or less refraction. 
 
 Rays passing through the optical centre of a lens^ 
 but not through the principal axis, suffer slight de- 
 viation, but emerge in the same direction as they 
 entered ; the deviation in thin lenses is so slight that 
 they are usually assumed to pass through in a straight 
 line; these are called secondary axes (Fig. 13). 
 
 Fig. 13. 
 
 Lenses with secondary axes undergoing slight deviation. 
 
BICONVEX LENSES 13 
 
 Parallel rays falling on a biconvex lens are rendered 
 convergent ; thus in Fig. 14 the rays A, b^ c, strike the 
 surface of the lens (l) at the points d, b, f; the centre 
 
 Fig. 14. 
 
 ray (b) falls on the lens at E perpendicular to its sur- 
 face, and therefore passes through in a straight line; 
 it also emerges from the lens at right angles to its 
 opposite surface, and so continues its course without 
 deviation ; but the ray A strikes the surface of the lens 
 obliquely at D, and as the ray is passing from one 
 medium (air) to another (glass) which is of greater den- 
 sity, it is bent towards the perpendicular of the surface 
 of the lens, shown by the dotted line m k ; the ray after 
 deviation passes through the lens, striking its opposite 
 surface obliquely at o, and as it leaves the lens, enters 
 the rarer medium (air), being deflected from the per- 
 pendicular NO; it is now directed to H, where it meets 
 the central ray B H; ray c, after undergoing similar 
 refractions, meets the other rays at h, and so also all 
 parallel rays falling on the biconvex lens (l). 
 
 Parallel rays, therefore, passing through a convex 
 lens (l) are brought to a focus at a certain fixed point 
 (a) beyond the lens ; this point is called the principal 
 
14 
 
 THE OrHTIlALMOSCOPE 
 
 focus, and the distance of this focus from the lens is 
 called the focal length of the lens. 
 
 Fio. 15. 
 
 Rays from a luminous point placed at the principal 
 focus (a) emerge as parallel after passing through 
 the lens. 
 
 Divergent rays from a point (b) outside the principal 
 focus (f. Fig. 16) meet at a distance beyond (p') the 
 
 Fig. 1(3. 
 
 principal focus on the other side of the lens (l), and 
 if the distance of the luminous point (b) is equal to 
 twice the focal length of the lens, the rays will focus 
 at a point (c) the same distance on the opposite side 
 of the lens, rays coming from c would also focus at 
 B ; they are therefore called conjugate foci, for we 
 can indifferently replace the image (c) by the object 
 (b) and the object (b) by the image (c). 
 
 If the luminous point (d) be between the lens and 
 
BICONVEX LENSES 
 
 15 
 
 the principal focus (f), then the rays will issue from 
 the lens divergent, though less so than before enter- 
 ing ; and if we prolong them backwards they will meet 
 at a point (h) further from the lens than the point D ; 
 H will therefore be the virtual focus of b, and the con- 
 jugate focus of D may be spoken of as negative. 
 
 Biconvex lenses have therefore two principal foci, 
 p and f', one on either side, at an equal distance from 
 the centre. 
 
 In ordinary lenses, and those in which the radii of 
 the two surfaces are nearly equal, the principal focus 
 closely coincides with the centre of curvature. 
 
 We have assumed the luminous point to be situated 
 on the principal axis; supposing, however, it be to 
 one side of it as at e (Fig. 17), then the line (e f) pass- 
 ing through the optical centre (c) of the lens (r.) is a 
 
 Fig. 17. 
 
 secondary axis, and the focus of the point e will be 
 found somewhere on this line, say at f, so that what 
 has been said respecting the focus of a luminous 
 point on the principal axis (a b) is equally true for 
 points on a secondary axis, provided always that the 
 inclination of this secondary axis is not too great, 
 when the focus would become imperfect from much 
 spherical aberration. 
 
16 
 
 THE OriTTTTALMOSCOPE 
 
 In biconcave lenses tlie foci are always virtual, 
 whatever the distance of the object. 
 
 Rays of light parallel to the axis diverge after 
 refraction^ and if their direction be continued back- 
 ward, they will meet at a point termed the principal 
 focus (Fig. 18, f). 
 
 Fro. IS. 
 
 Fig. 19 shows the refraction of parallel rays by a 
 biconcave lens (l) ; the centre ray b strikes the lens 
 at E perpendicular to its surface, passing through 
 without refraction, and as it emerges from the oppo- 
 
 FiG. 19. 
 
 site side of the lens perpendicular to its surface, it 
 continues in a straight line; the ray A strikes the 
 lens obliquely at d and is refracted towards the 
 perpendicular, shown by the dotted line a H; the ray 
 after deviation passes through the lens to k, where, 
 
FORMATION OV IMAGKS 
 
 17 
 
 on entering the medium of less density obliquely, it 
 is refracted from the perpendicular o p, in the direc- 
 tion K M ; the same takes place with ray c, at f and 
 N, so also with all intermediate parallel rays. 
 
 Formation of images. — To illustrate the formation of 
 images the following simple experiment may be 
 carried out. Place on one side of a screen having a 
 small perforation, a candle, and on the other side a 
 sheet of white cardboard at some distance from the 
 screen, to receive the image formed; rays diverge 
 from the candle in all directions, most of those falling 
 on the screen are intercepted by it, but some few 
 rays pass through the perforation and form an image 
 of the candle on the cardboard, the image being 
 inverted because the rays cross each other at the 
 orifice ; it can further be shown that when the candle 
 
 Fro. 20. 
 
 
 -e) 
 
 and cardboard are equally distant from the perfo- 
 rated screen, the candle flame and its image will be 
 of the same size. If the cardboard be moved further 
 from the perforation the image is enlarged, if it be 
 moved nearer it is diminished ; if we make a dozen 
 more perforations in the screen, a dozen more images 
 will be formed on the cardboard, if a hundred, then 
 
 2 
 
18 
 
 THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 a liuiidred ; but if the apertures come so close 
 together that the images overlap, then instead of so 
 many distinct images we get a general illumination 
 of the cardboard. 
 
 The image of an object is the collection of the foci 
 of its several points ; the images formed by lenses are, 
 as in the case of the foci, real or virtual. Images 
 formed, therefore, by convex lenses, may be real or 
 virtual. 
 
 In Fig. 21, let A b be a candle situated at an 
 infinite distance ; from the extremities of A b draw 
 
 Fig. 21. 
 
 Ktiil inverted image formed by convex lens. 
 
 two lines passing through the optical centre (c) of a 
 biconvex lens, the image of A will be formed some- 
 where on this line A c a (termed a secondary axis), say 
 at a; the image of b will be formed on the line b c 6, 
 say at h ; therefore 5 a is a small inverted image of 
 the candle A b, formed at the principal focus of the 
 convex lens. Had the candle been placed at twice 
 the focal distance of the lens, then its image would 
 be formed at the same point on the opposite side 
 of the lens, of the same size as the object, and in- 
 verted. 
 
FORMATION OP IMAGES 
 
 ]9 
 
 If the candle be at the principal focus (f), then the 
 image is at an infinite distance, the rays after refrac- 
 tion being parallel. 
 
 If, however, the candle (a b) be nearer the lens 
 than the focus, then the rays which diverge from the 
 candle will, after passing through the convex lens, be 
 still divergent, so that no image is formed ; an eye 
 placed at e would receive the rays from a b as if they 
 
 Fig. 22. 
 
 Virtual image formed by convex lens. 
 
 came from ah; a 6 is therefore a virtual image of 
 A B, erect and larger than the object, and formed on 
 the same side of the lens as the object. 
 
 Images formed by biconcave lenses are always 
 
 Fig. 23. 
 
 Virtual image formed by concave lens. 
 
 virtual, erect, and smaller than the object; let A b be 
 a candle, and f the principal focus of a biconcave 
 
.20 THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 lens ; draw from A b two Hues through c^ the 
 optical centre of the lens, and lines also from a and 
 B parallel to the axis ; after passing through the lens 
 they diverge and have the appearance of coming from 
 a b, which is therefore the virtual image of A B. 
 
 A real image can be projected on to a screen, but 
 a virtual one can only be seen by looking through 
 the lens. 
 
TFIR OPHTHAOIOSCOPE 
 
 21 
 
 CHAPTER II 
 
 THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 When an eye is looked at, tlie pupil appears black 
 altliough the media are perfectly transparent ; this is 
 because the rays entering the eye return to the point 
 from which they emanate, and therefore, unless the 
 observing eye can be placed in the path of returning 
 rays, none of them will pass through the observer's 
 pupil, and so no illumination will be seen. 
 
 Fig 24. 
 
 In Fig. 24 rays will be seen entering the eye from 
 candle a, and since the refractive system of the eye 
 is exactly adjusted for the candle flame, the rays 
 returning from the eye will traverse the same path as 
 those entering it; if the eye be not adapted for the 
 candle flame, then the rays will return towards the 
 source of light. 
 
22 
 
 THE OrHTflALMOSCOPE 
 
 In the albino, as in the white rabbit, the pupil may 
 appear illuminated ; this is due to the transparency 
 of the iris, so that the returning rays cover a larger 
 area than is the case when passing through an ordinary 
 pupil, then some of the outer rays may pass through 
 the observer's pupil, if placed nearly in the line of 
 light from which the observed eye receives its rays : 
 that this is the correct explanation can easily be 
 proved by covering up the part corresponding to the 
 iris by an opaque diaphragm, when the pupil will at 
 once appear black, as in the normal eye. In hyper- 
 m'^tropia and myopia with a dilated pupil, one fre- 
 quently gets a slight fundus illumination. This is 
 illustrated in the following figures. 
 
 In hypermetropin, Fig, 25, the returning rays, 
 
 Fio. 25. 
 
 instead of being parallel as in emmetropia, diverge 
 somewhat, so that the observing eye placed at b 
 would receive some of the returning rays. 
 
 In myopia. Fig. 26, the returning rays converge, 
 cross, and diverge, so that the eye placed at b would 
 receive some illumination. 
 
 The ophthalmoscope is a contrivance which enables 
 the observing eye to be placed in the path of the re- 
 
THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE 23 
 
 turning rays, and consists of a reflector with a hole 
 in the centre. 
 
 Fio. 20. 
 
 Although the inveutiou of the o])litlialmoscope 
 is of recent date, it had long been known that the 
 eye was illuminated by rays entering the globe, 
 and it was thought that these rays were entirely 
 absorbed by the pigment contained in the retina and 
 choroid, but it was afterwards pointed out that some 
 parts, such as the disc, must even then reflect some 
 light, and that the apparent blackness of the pupil 
 must be due to the optical law "that rays of light 
 leaving the eye, return towards the source of illumi' 
 nation'^ so that unless the eye of the observer can be 
 placed in the path of the returning rays, no illumina- 
 tion can be obtained. Briicke was very nearly solving 
 the question by placing a tube through the flame of a 
 candle, which enabled him to catch some of the re- 
 turning rays of light; but it remained for Helmholtz 
 to overcome the difficulty by producing his first oph- 
 thalmoscope. 
 
 Helmholtz's ophthalmoscope, which he introduced 
 in 1851, was composed of three pieces of plane glass. 
 Fig. 27. 
 
 Rays reflected from a light A, are projected into 
 the eye b, by the mirror m, the light returning from 
 
24 THE OrnTHALMOSCOrE 
 
 the observed eye by the same path will fall on the 
 glass Mj a part is reflected to a, and a part passes 
 
 Via. 27. 
 
 through the glass towards c ; an observing eye placed 
 behind the mirror will, therefore, receive some of the 
 returning rays. 
 
 Ophthalmoscopes have undergone numerous modi- 
 fications, and the iustrument with which we now 
 work consists of a silvered concave glass mirror, with 
 a central perforation. 
 
 In Fig. 28, divergent rays from a candle c, falling 
 on the mirror m, are rendered convergent, and when 
 reflected into the eye e, cross in the vitreous and 
 light up the fundus between the points G and d ; if 
 point H of this illuminated area be taken, the rays 
 will (in the emmetropic eye) issue parallel, and pass- 
 ing through the sight-hole of the mirror, will enter 
 the observing eye A, forming on the retina at h' an 
 image of h. 
 
 The amount of fundus illumination obtained will 
 necessarily depend upon the source and intensity of 
 
•VUK OrnTITALMOSCOPE 
 
 25 
 
 the liglit^ the concavity of tlic mirror used, tlie dis- 
 tance from the eye at which the examination is made, 
 and the size of the pupil in the observed eye. 
 
 Modern ophthalmoscopes are fitted with a series of 
 
26 THE OrnTHALMOSCOrE 
 
 lenses, which can bo revolved in front of the sight- 
 hole ; these are known as refracting ophthalmoscopes. 
 Many good ones have been devised, varying but 
 slightly in some or other minor particulars. 
 
 The essential points of a thoroughly complete 
 ophthalmoscope are, that it should be supplied with 
 three mirrors, — a small concave, a large concave, and 
 a plane one ; together with a fairly complete set of 
 lenses, which can be brought in front of the sight-hole 
 of the instrument as occasion requires. 
 
 (1) The small concave mirror is for the direct 
 examination; it should have a focus of about 7*5 cm., 
 so that light reflected from it will enter the eye 
 as convergent rays. The sight-hole should not be 
 larger than 2| mm., because only that part of the 
 mirror which immediately surrounds the aperture 
 is available in the direct examination, and should 
 the sight-hole be larger than tlie pupil, then no 
 fundus illumination will be obtained. The small 
 mirror may be conveniently tilted about 25° ; this 
 allows the ophthalmoscope to be held perfectly 
 straight while the light is reflected into the observed 
 eye, enabling one to look through the lens which 
 may be behind the sight-hole at right angles to its 
 surfaces. With the old-fashioned mirror the ophthal- 
 moscope itself had to be tilted towards the light, 
 and with it, of course, the lenses, so that they were 
 looked through obliquely, and thus the strength of 
 the lens was increased and some astigmatism pro- 
 duced ; hence the estimation of the refraction by the 
 direct method was liable to be inaccurate. The 
 
THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE 27 
 
 disadvantage of some tilted mirrors is the distance 
 that intervenes between the two sides of the sight- 
 hole, technically called "tunnelling;" this tunnelling 
 somewhat diminishes the size of the field seen, hut, 
 what is more important, prevents the eye of tlie 
 examiner from approaching sufficiently near that of 
 the person examined ; and it may be stated as an 
 axiom, that the nearer the observing eye can approach 
 the ohservedj the more accurate will he the estimation of 
 the refraction. 
 
 (2) The large concave mirror is for the indirect 
 method of examination and for retinoscopy ; it should 
 have a focal length of 25 cm., so that rays from a 
 light situated 25 cm. from the mirror will be reflected 
 parallel ; when the light is further off than 25 cm. 
 then the rays will be slightly convergent ; this mirror 
 may possess an aperture of 3 or 3 J mm. 
 
 (3) The plane mirror is useful for the examination 
 of the vitreous, and in some cases of high mjopia; 
 with this mirror rays of light coming from a lamp at 
 a finite distance, will be reflected into the eye as 
 divergent rays. The plane mirror may also be used 
 for retinoscopy. 
 
 Tlie ophthalmoscope should be supplied with a set 
 of lenses, which can in turn be brought behind the 
 sight-hole by means of a finger wheel ; this wheel 
 should be so made and placed, that it may be rotated 
 easily while the instrument is in position without 
 losing sight of the fundus. The lenses may be some- 
 what as follows: a convex series -f5 D., +1 D., 
 increasing by one dioptre up to +10 D. ; and a 
 
28 TFIE OPTTTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 concave series —'5 D., —1 D., increasing by one 
 dioptre up to —12 D., and then by two dioptres up 
 to — 20 D. Sometimes a higher glass may be re- 
 quired; these may be supplied on a separate disc; 
 the lenses in this disc may, by combination with the 
 other lenses, form a very large series. 
 
 The lenses should not be less than 6 mm. in 
 diameter, otherwisv_ they are difficult to centre pro- 
 perly, and cannot be easily cleaned — a point of some 
 importance ; they may occasionally be used for the 
 subjective test of estimating the visual acuteness, 
 should the box of trial lenses not be at hand. 
 
 It will be sufficient here to describe and to figure 
 one of the ophthalmoscopes in general use, though 
 numerous other good instruments will be found in 
 this country and abroad. 
 
 Morton's ophthalmoscope, shown in Fig. 29, is 
 a modification of an instrument introduced by Mr 
 Couper; it contains a series of twenty-nine lenses in 
 metal rings, and one metal ring without a glass ; 
 these run round a continuous channel, and are so 
 arranged that each can be brought successively in 
 front of the sight-hole by means of a driving wheel. 
 
 When no lens is required, then the empty ring 
 occupies the sight-hole ; these lenses touch each 
 other sideways, but are not fixed in any way ; on the 
 spindle that carries the driving wheel is another 
 wheel with teeth, which propel the lenses round the 
 instrument ; a spring and notch attached to the 
 driving wheel centres each lens as it arrives at the 
 sight-hole. The strength of the glass before the 
 
THE OrilTHALMOSCOrE 
 
 29 
 
 sight-hole is recorded by an index wheel, which, 
 being geared to the driving wheel, keeps pace with 
 it, and therefore with the lens series. The minus 
 glasses are contained in white rings, and are in- 
 dicated by white numbers ; the convex glasses are 
 in red rings and have red numbers. 
 
 Fio. 29. 
 
 This series of lenses is usually sufficient for most 
 ordinary purposes, but occasionally other lenses are 
 required and are provided on a special disc. Some- 
 times a strong convex glass is required for the 
 examination of the cornea or lens; at other times a 
 strong concave lens is necessary for a case of high 
 myopia. This separate disc, therefore, has a + 20 D. 
 and a — 50 D. so placed that they can be instantly 
 put in front of, or removed away from, the sight-hole 
 
30 THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 without rotating the whole series of lenses. On this 
 same disc are also a + '5 D. and a — 10 D. : the 
 former of these enables one to estimate to within 
 half a dioptre in special cases ; and the latter, by use 
 in conjunction with other concave lenses contained in 
 the series, gives us from — ID. to— 20D., with in- 
 tervals of one dioptre, and — 20 D. to — 30 D., with 
 intervals of two dioptres. This disc is well shown in 
 the illustration. The instrument is supplied with 
 three mirrors ; a large concave one of 25 cm. focus, 
 and a small tilted one of 7' 5 cm. focus ; these are fixed 
 by a pivot, so that either can be turned in front of 
 the sight-hole as occasion requires : the large concave 
 mirror can be replaced, when necessary, by a plane 
 one. 
 
 The movement in this ophthalmoscope is a great 
 improvement over the method formerly employed, of 
 placing the lenses in a revolving wheel. The credit 
 of this ingenious invention is due to Mr Couper, who 
 was much assisted by Mr Paxton, of the firm of 
 Curry and Paxton. 
 
 M. Parent, of Paris, has recently brought out a 
 very beautiful instrument, combining the advantages 
 of all the recent ophthalmoscopes, and fitted with a 
 series of cylindrical lenses in addition to the ordinary 
 spherical series. M. Parent strongly advocates the 
 use of cylindrical lenses for the estimation of the 
 refraction in cases of astigmatism by the direct 
 method. 
 
 Lang's ophthalmoscope is also used a good deal in 
 this country, and is a very convenient instrument. 
 
THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 31 
 
 A useful mirror to carry in the waistcoat pocket 
 is that known by the name of Galizowski, Fig. 30; 
 it is convenient for the indirect examination and 
 for retinoscopy; its focal length is 25 cm. If the 
 handle be made to double over the face, no case 
 will be required to protect it. 
 
 Fig. 30. 
 
 The student also requires a large biconvex lens 
 (+13 D.), which is necessary for focal illumination 
 and the indirect method of examination. 
 
 A magnifying glass made of flint and crown glass 
 (achromatic), and having a focus of 1*5 cm., is very 
 convenient for examining the cornea, iris, and lens. 
 
 Demonstrating ophthalmoscopes are also made, but 
 need not be described. 
 
32 THE OrilTIFALMOSCOPE 
 
 CHAPTER III 
 
 METHODS OP EXAMINATION 
 
 The incandescent electric li"lit of sixteen-candle 
 power contained in a ground-glass sliade, and the 
 ordinary gas Argand burner, are both suitable lights 
 for ophthahnoscope work ; they should be arranged on 
 a bracket which is capable of up and down as well as 
 lateral movement^ while the arm of the bracket should 
 be sufficiently long to allow the light to be placed on 
 either side of the patient without his having to move. 
 When these lights are not to be obtained_, an ordinary 
 oil lamp may be used, or even a candle. The patient 
 should be seated on a chair, while the observer may 
 conveniently use a music stool, the height of which 
 can be altered as occasion requires; some observers 
 prefer to stand when making an examination. A 
 dark room is also an advantage. 
 
 In many cases it is necessary to dilate the pupil 
 with a mydriatic; one that acts quickly and fully, 
 and the effect of which soon passes off, is to be pre- 
 ferred. 
 
 The most convenient combination is — 
 
 1^ Homatropinse Hydrobromatis, gr. iv. 
 
 Cocainse Hydrocliloratis, gr. x. 
 
 Acidi Salicjlici, gr. ij. 
 
 Aquae Destillatse, ^j. 
 Gr. guttse. 
 
METHODS OF EXAMINATION 33 
 
 A drop of this solution produces full dilatation in 
 a very sliorfc time, and the effect passes off in two or 
 three hours. Of course in many cases no mydriatic 
 is required, but when a thorough examination is 
 necessary it is a great advantage to examine the eye 
 through a well-dilated pupil ; this is especially the 
 case when some changes have been detected in the 
 fundus, and further information is required by a 
 more searching examination, carried out under the 
 most favorable conditions. 
 
 But the student should learn not to rely too much 
 upon these minor aids, but accustom himself to 
 examine the fundus in various positions and uuder 
 different surroundings, with or without a mydriatic. 
 
 It is recommended that every opportunity be taken 
 to make repeated ophthalmoscopic examinations, and 
 where a large number of patients is not to be met 
 with. Frost's artificial eye (Fig. 31 ) will be of great 
 service in enabling the student to acquire the neces- 
 sary associated movements, as well as to understand 
 and appreciate many points of importance with regard 
 to the size and formation of the images in the various 
 conditions of refraction. 
 
 The first thing for a beginner to do is to familiarise 
 himself with the variations of the normal fundus. 
 Very great differences are met with ; as numerous 
 almost as the various shades of hair found in tlie 
 human race. 
 
 Besides, even in those cases where the visual 
 acuteness is normal, and no symptouis indicative of 
 disease are present, gross changes may be found, or 
 
 3 
 
34 
 
 THE OrnxnALMOSCOPE 
 
 congenital peculiarities may exist wliicli ought not to 
 be missed. 
 
 Fig. 31. 
 
 Generally, young ophthalmologists disdain to look 
 at a normal fundus, caring only for pathological con- 
 ditions ; it would be much better for every one to 
 look at a certain number of normal fundi before pass- 
 ing on to the various diseases. Usually the reverse 
 is the method of procedure ; abnormal cases are 
 looked at first, varied only very occasionally by a 
 normal case. 
 
METHODS OP EXAMINATION 35 
 
 In undertaking an ophthalmoscopic examination, it 
 should be conducted quietly and without hurry; a 
 number of students standing round anxious to look 
 at the same case is not conducive to a thorough exa- 
 mination. A regular routine is absolutely necessaiy ; 
 accuracy and confidence are thereby attained. First, 
 the cornea, iris, and lens must be examined hy focal 
 ilhimination ; then the large concave mirror is used at 
 a distance of about two thirds of a metre, and may 
 give an indication of the refraction of the eye, and 
 allow the condition of the vitreous to be ascertained ; 
 this should be followed by the indirect method of exa- 
 mination, which enables that part of the fundus which 
 is within reach of the ophthalmoscope to be readily 
 scanned ; the examination is completed by the direct 
 method, which gives an image magnified some eighteen 
 diameters, and allows minute changes, not visible by 
 the indirect method, to be detected, while at the same 
 time it allows of an estimate of the refraction beins* 
 made. 
 
 When any change has been detected in the cornea, 
 iris, or lens, this may conveniently be examined with 
 the oblique mirror, having a +20 D. behind the 
 sight-hole of the ophthalmoscope, and approaching 
 close to the patient as with the direct method ; when 
 the iris and lens are examined in this way, a some- 
 what weaker glass is necessary, + IG D. 
 
36 
 
 THE OPnTITALMOSCOrE 
 
 Focal Illumination 
 
 Tlie patient being seated opposite a good artificial 
 light, the observer takes up the large biconvex lens 
 of 13 D. between the thumb and forefinger of one 
 hand, and concentrates the light obliquely on the 
 cornea, iris, and crystalline lens successiv^ely. By 
 this means opacities and irregularities of the cornea, 
 affections of the iris, opacities of the lens, and even 
 disease involving the anterior part of the vitreous may 
 be detected. To examine every part of the lens and 
 the vitreous, ifc is absolutely necessary that the pupil 
 be dilated with a mydriatic. Then, tumours of the 
 ciliary region, vitreous opacities, sparkling synchj^sis, 
 and even detached retina, may be seen. 
 
 Fig. 32. 
 
 By varying the position of the light and of the eye 
 ider examination, every part can be thoroughly in- 
 
METHODS OF EXAMINATION 37 
 
 spected. Wlieu the deeper parts of tlie lens and the 
 vitreous are examined, the light must be thrown into 
 the eye in an almost perpendicular manner, as shown 
 in Fig. 32. 
 
 Fio. 33. 
 
 One great advantage of the focal illumination is 
 that everything is seen of its real colour and in its 
 true position. 
 
 This examination may with advantage be supple- 
 mented by using a second lens before the eye as a 
 magnifying glass, oi", still better, the small achro- 
 matic glass made for that purpose and referred to on 
 p. 31. (Fig. 33.) 
 
38 
 
 THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 The Large Concave Mirror at a Distance 
 
 The light shoukl now bo pbicod on one side of the 
 patient, on a level with the head and slightly behind, 
 so that no direct light falls on his face ; the observer, 
 sitting opposite^ places before his eye the large concave 
 mirror, and at a distance of about two thirds of a 
 metre reflects the light into the eye he wishes to exa- 
 mine; usually a red fundus reflex is obtained, but 
 no details will be visible; should any of the vessels 
 or a part of the disc be seen, then we shall know that 
 the eye under examination is ametropic. 
 
 Because in emmetropia (Fig. 34), the rajs which come from the 
 two extremities of the disc (a b) emerge as two sets of parallel 
 
 Fig. 34. 
 
 rajs in the same direction as the rajs a c, b d, which, having 
 passed through the nodal point, undergo no refraction. These 
 two sets of rajs soon diverge, leaving a space between them, so 
 that an observer, unless he be quite close to the observed eje, is 
 unable to bring these raj's to a focus on his retina, and therefore 
 at a distance from the eje the observer sees onlj a diffused and 
 blurred image. 
 
 In lijpermetropiu (Fig. 35) the rays from the two points (a b) 
 emerge from the eje in two sets of diverging rajs, in the same 
 direction as the rajs a c, b d, which undergo no refraction. These 
 
THE CONCAVE MIRROR AT A DISTANCE 39 
 
 divergin<^ rays liave tlie appearance oE coining from two points 
 {a b) behind tlie eye, where an erect imaginary image is formed 
 (a 6). 
 
 Fig. 35. 
 
 Here the observer at a distance sees a clear, erect image, which 
 is formed behind the eye. 
 
 In myopia (Fig. 36), the rays from the two points (a b) emerge 
 
 Fig. 36. 
 
 as two converging sets of rays, whicli meet at a h on tlieir secon- 
 dary axes, thus forming an inverted image in front of the eye. 
 This image can be distinctly seen by the observer if he be at a 
 sufficient distance from the point, and accommodating for the 
 particular spot at which the aerial image is formed. The higlier 
 the myopia the nearer to the e^'e will tliis image be formed. 
 
 From the above observations it will be understood that if the 
 observer now move his head from side to side, and the vessels of 
 the disc are seen to move in tlie same direction, tlie case would be 
 one of hypermetropia, the image formed being an erect one. 
 
40 THE OrHTOALMOSCOPE 
 
 Had tlic vessels moved in the opposite direction to the 
 observer's head the case would be one of myopia, the image 
 being an inverted one formed in the air in front of the eye. 
 
 If the vessels of one meridian only are visible, then we have a 
 case of astigmatism, h^^permetropic if moving in the same, and 
 myopic if moving in tlie opposite direction to the observer's head, 
 that meridian being ametropic which is at right angles to the 
 vessels seen. 
 
 In mixed astigmatism the vessels of one meridian move against 
 the observer's movements, and those of the other meridian with 
 them ; this is difficult to see. 
 
 Should no f Lindas reflex be obtained when the light 
 is thus properly reflected into the eye^ the case may 
 be one of haemorrhage into the vitreous, or other 
 serious lesion : but the reflex may be good, and yet it 
 may appear irregular by the presence of black spots 
 here or there; in this case probably some opacity 
 exists in the cornea, lens, or vitreous, which interferes 
 with the returning rays of light, and so appears 
 black, whatever the real colour of the opacity may 
 be; and if nothing was seen by careful inspection 
 with focal illumination, the opacity is in all proba- 
 bility situated in the vitreous ; this is certainly the 
 case if the opacity is floating. The movements of 
 these floating opacities will be more conspicuous if 
 the patient be directed to first look upwards, then 
 downwards, and finally straight in front of him ; the 
 rate of movement will be a guide as to the consis- 
 tency of the vitreous, and the direction of their move- 
 ments will depend upon their position in the vitreous, 
 whether they are in front of or behind the centre of 
 rotation of the eyeball — a point situated in the normal 
 
THE INDIRECT METHOD 41 
 
 emmetropic eye 9*8 mm. in front of the retina 
 (Fig. 63). 
 
 Sometimes the vitreous opacities may be so thin 
 that some of the returning liglit may pass through 
 them ; they will then appear more or less white or 
 pink ; occasionally light may be reflected from the 
 surface of the opacity, and then it will appear white 
 and more or less glistening, this is the case when 
 cholesterine or ty rosin crystals are present. 
 
 The Indirect Method 
 
 The examination with the large concave mirror at 
 a distance, which has taken some time to describe, 
 occupies only a very short time, and we pass on 
 without a break to the indirect examination. With 
 the large concave mirror still before the observer's 
 eye, and lighting up the eye under examination, the 
 biconvex lens which was used for the focal illumina- 
 tion is held up between the mirror and the patient's 
 eye at about its focal distance from the latter ; an 
 inverted image of the fundus will thus be obtained, 
 magnified about five diameters : the amount of 
 magnification depends upon the strength of the 
 objective used ; the stronger the lens, the less is the 
 image magnified, and therefore the greater the field 
 that comes into view. The size of the field that can 
 be seen at once will depend upon the strengtli and 
 size of the object-glass : thus, with a dilated ])upil 
 and a lens of + 13 D., having a diameter of about 5 
 cm..j the size of the field will be about 8 mm., or four 
 
42 
 
 THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 times as large a field as will be seen by the direct 
 method. 
 
 The image formed by the lens will in the case of 
 emmetropia be at the focus of the convex glass, 
 between it and the observing eye, so that the learner 
 has to remember to accommodate for the image at 
 this distance. 
 
 It is convenient to use the mirror before the right 
 eye with the right hand when examining the patient's 
 
 Fig. 37. 
 
 right eye, and before the left eye with the left hand 
 when examining the patient's left eye; then the 
 objective will be held between the finger and thumb 
 of the opposite hand. This may be steadied if neces- 
 sary by resting the little finger against the forehead. 
 By adopting this procedure the hand holding the 
 
THE INDIRECT METHOD 
 
 43 
 
 c « o d >< ^" 2 
 
 — Tn ^ ® " '5 
 
 ?j p o - H ^;, 
 
 -, = o :: '- § g 
 
 "-^ ^ « « S 
 
 ii ^j 1* ^ -^ «♦-< 
 
 *-> O > Ta -^ '''' 
 
 a> 
 
 ^ s 5 5 2 5 S .2 
 u o •^::3 -3 ^ •- « 
 
 — o o 03 ii -i<*.S <y 
 
 ^ ^ t! (^ c ° '^ S 
 
 
 -rt O 2i O "^ C O 
 
 t3 w rr <y 
 
 O pq W t- 
 
 -fcJ -: g fT. cp 
 
 o rs 3 f*< o 
 
 g 
 
 o 
 ■♦J 
 
 o 
 
 ^ . O +3 o ^ ,„ 
 i S /^ ci^ - C3 "^^ 
 
 ^ o 
 
 -2 ?:55 
 
 o ;; 
 
 3 -tf ^ ^ fct£ ^ 2 
 
 5-=- o 5-2 o'S 
 
 2 v^ 'i ^ .5 =* 2 o 
 
 - es ^ O) ti^ o 
 
 " ^^ Kl O ri "^ 
 
 X 3 J, « ^ -^ o ,2 
 
 -3 5 ^ «J *- 
 
 !_. O S o SJ <« 
 
 ^ ^ <;j #-i 
 
 O 5 o SJ 
 
 ce u 
 
 - o o ^ 
 O ^> OS O 
 
44 THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 objective is not over the patient's face. Some ob- 
 servers, however, always use the same eye for the 
 indirect examination ; thus if the right be the one 
 preferred, tlic observer will always hold the ophthal- 
 moscope in his right hand, using the objective with 
 the left : this is simply a matter of individual con- 
 venience. The eye of the observer not in use may 
 with advantage be kept open. 
 
 Although not necessary it is an advantage to use a 
 + 4 D. behind the ophthalmoscope ; one thus obtains 
 a somewhat larger image, which can be seen without 
 accommodatiug, at the focus of the biconvex lens used. 
 Thus when examining the fundus of an emmetrope, 
 the aerial inverted image will be formed at the focus 
 of the objective, which in the case of a + 13 D. lens 
 will be a little less than 8 cm., the observer (with a 
 + 4 D. behind his mirror) situated at 25 cm. from 
 this image will see it clearly and well defined at this 
 distance without any accommodation : the advantage 
 of this plan is that the observer sits nearer the patient 
 than when the examination is made without the -f 4 D., 
 and does not have to stretch his arm out so far when 
 holding up the objective. 
 
 The first part to which attention should be directed 
 is the disc. If one is examining the right eye, the 
 patient should be told to look towards one's right 
 ear, or, what is perhaps better, at the upheld little 
 finger of the right hand which is holding the mirror; 
 the fundus reflex being obtained, it will be noticed 
 to be somewhat whiter when coming from the optic 
 disc ; the large convex glass is held between the 
 
THE INDIRECT METHOD 45 
 
 thumb and finger of the left hand, about 3 or 4 cm. 
 directly in front of the observed eye; this will 
 form an inverted image of the disc, which should 
 be clearly seen by the observer. The beginner will 
 find some difficulty at first in performing these asso- 
 ciated movements of lighting up the fundus with the 
 mirror, and keeping the light steadily on the eye 
 while the objective is held in the other hand and 
 moved about backwards and forwards, and from side 
 to side. 
 
 The next part to examine is the periphery ; this 
 must be gone over systematically by directing the 
 patient to look up, then down, then to the right, and 
 finally to the left. By this means the posterior 
 hemisphere of the eyeball may be thoroughly in- 
 spected, especially when the pupil has been dilated 
 with a mydriatic. 
 
 A still more peripheral part of the fundus can be 
 seen by using an objective glass which is composed 
 of two elements, a biconvex lens and a prism ; such a 
 glass is called a prismosphere. 
 
 Finally the macula region demands attention. This 
 part is difficult to see, as the pupil contracts vigorously 
 when the light is directed on this, the most sensitive 
 part of tlie fundus; besides, the corneal reflex comes 
 directly in the line of vision. The patient should be 
 directed to look at the sight-hole of the mirror, or 
 slightly to one side of it ; then with a little 
 manoeuvring with the mirror and lens, and a certain 
 amount of practice, a fairly good view of this part 
 may be obtained. 
 
46 THE OPnTKALMOSCOPE 
 
 Tlie reflections formed by the cornea and by the 
 objective are always somewhat troublesome to the 
 Le<>^inner ; by tiltini^ the lens slightly these images 
 will bo thrown out of the line of vision. 
 
 Variations in the Size of the Image in Ametropia. — 
 
 The contlition of tlie refraction of the eye under examination will 
 cause some variation in the size of the images obtained ; thus in 
 emmetropia, rajs coming from a, Fig. 39, emerge from the eye 
 parallel, and are focussed by the biconvex lens at a, and rays 
 
 Fig. 39. 
 
 coming from B are focussed at 6 ; so also vs^ith rays coming from 
 every part of A B, forming an inverted image of A b at h a, 
 situated in the air at the principal focus of the biconvex lens. 
 In hypermetropia (Fig. 40) the rays from A emerge divergent, 
 
 Fig. 40. 
 
 so also, of course, those from b ; if these rays are continued back- 
 ward, they will meet behind the eye, and there form an enlarged 
 
THE INDIRECT METHOD 47 
 
 upright image (a /3) of a b ; it is of this imaginary projected 
 image that we obtain, by the help of the biconvex lens, a final 
 inverted image {b a), situated in front of the lens beyond its 
 principal focus. 
 
 In myopia (Fig. 41) the rays from A and b emerge from the eye 
 
 Fig. 41. 
 
 convergent, forming an inverted aerial image in front of the eye 
 at /3 a, its punctum remotum. It is of this image we obtain, with 
 a biconvex lens placed between it and the eye, a final image (b a) 
 situated within the focus of the biconvex lens. 
 
 Tiie inverted image of the disc, produced by a convex lens at a 
 certain fixed distance from the cornea, is larger in hypermetropia, 
 and smaller in myopia, than in emmetropia. The lens should 
 next be held close to the patient's eye, and then gradually with- 
 drawn, while the aerial image of the disc is steadily kept in view; 
 if any increase or decrease take place in the size of this image, we 
 shall know that the eye is ametropic. 
 
 If no change take place in the size of the image on thus with- 
 drawing the objective the case is one of emmetropia, because rays 
 issue from such an eye parallel, and the image formed by the 
 object-glass will always be situated at its principal focus, no 
 matter at what distance the glass is from the observed eye 
 (Fig. 42). As the distance of the image from the object-lens is 
 always the same, the size of the image will also be the same. 
 
 If diminution take place in the size of the image the case is 
 one of hypermetropia, and the greater the diminution the higher 
 is the hypermetropia. 
 
 This change in size may be explained by remembering that in 
 
48 
 
 THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 hypernictropia the imajj^e of the disc formed by the object-glass is 
 situated beyond its principal focus, owing to the rays issuing from 
 
 Fig. 42. 
 
 E. Emmetropic eye. Kays issuing parallel, image formed at 
 the principal focus of the lens, no matter at what distance 
 the lens is from the eye. 
 
 the eye being divergent ; the relative size of the final image (3 a 
 to the object a b will therefore vary directly as the length c a, 
 and inversel}" as the length c a ; so that on withdrawing the lens 
 c from the observed eye, c a diminishes and c a increases ; there- 
 fore the ratio of a h io a 13 diminishes, i.e. the size of the image 
 diminishes. The two diagrams 43 and 44 show images formed by 
 
 Fig. 43. 
 
 Lens at 4 cm. from the curuea. 
 
 the object-glass when held at 4 cm. and at 12 cm. from the 
 cornea, the latter image being the smaller. 
 
 If the image become larger on withdrawing the object-glass, the 
 case is one of myopia ; the greater the increase of the image, the 
 higher the myopia. 
 
THE INDIRECT METHOD 49 
 
 Tliis increase in tlie size of the image can also be explained 
 with the help of mathematics, remembering that, in myopia, an 
 
 Via. 44, 
 
 Lens at 12 cm. from the cornea. 
 
 H. Hypermetropic eye. c. The centre of the lens. A b. 
 Image on the retina, a h. Projected image. /3 a. The final 
 image formed by the objective. 
 
 inverted image is formed in front of the eye (Fig. 36), and it is of 
 this we obtain a final image, with a convex glass placed between 
 the eye and the inverted image, which we must regard as the 
 object, the object and its image being both on the same side of 
 the lens. 
 
 In astigmatism the disc, Instead of appearing round, is frequently 
 oval. If one meridian decrease in size, while the other remain 
 stationary as the objective is withdrawn, it is a case of simple 
 hypermetropic astigmatism. If the whole disc decrease in size, 
 one meridian diminishing more than the other, it is compound 
 hypermetropic astigmatism, the meridian being most hypermetropic 
 which diminishes most. 
 
 Increase in one meridian, the other remaining stationary, indi- 
 cates simple m^'opic astigmatism. 
 
 Increase in the size of the disc, but one meridian increasing 
 more than the other, indicates compound myopic astigmatism, 
 that meridian being most myopic which increases most. 
 
 If one meridian increase while the other decrease the case is one 
 of mixed astigmatism. 
 
 It must be remembered that by the indirect method 
 everything is inverted ; thus the apparent position of 
 
 4 
 
50 
 
 THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 Fig. 45. 
 
 B 
 
 The above figure is intended to represent, by means of A, the 
 real size of the optic disc; by means of b, the size of the 
 image formed by the indirect method; and by c, the size 
 of the image formed by the direct method. It also shows 
 in the case b the effect of the inversion ; this effect is 
 rendered more apparent by the patch of choroiditis shown 
 in the figure. 
 
THE INDIEECT METHOD 51 
 
 the macula is to the inner side, when of course its 
 real position is outside, the apparent upper edge of 
 the disc is the lower, and so on. Fig. 45 b represents 
 this inversion. 
 
 Magnification of the image seen by the indirect method. 
 — To estimate the degree of enlargement obtained by 
 the inverted image we must recall to our minds the 
 fact, that the image we see in this method of examina- 
 tiou is a real image formed in the air by the union of 
 the rays coming from the eye and passing through 
 the convex lens. This image can be received upon a 
 screen and measured exactly ; therefore to estimate 
 the degree of enlargement, we have only to measure 
 the size of the inverted image of the disc and com- 
 pare it with the size of the disc itself. 
 
 We are at once met by the difficulty that the size 
 of the disc varies in different individuals, so that 
 we do not know its exact size in any particular 
 case. 
 
 If the biconvex lens with which we obtain the 
 inverted image be placed at such a distance from the 
 eye that its focus coincides with the nodal point of 
 the observed eye, a point situated in the emmetropic 
 eye 15 mm. in front of the retina; then the enlarge- 
 ment may be expressed by the simple formula — 
 
 n 
 
 of which X equals the amount of enlargement of 
 the image ; / equals the focal distance of the lens 
 
52 THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 used to produce the inverted image ; while u is the 
 distance between the nodal point and the retina. 
 
 Suppose, for example, we wish to know the amount 
 of cnlarcrement of the ima":e in the case of an emme- 
 trope with a ghiss of 13 D. Then /equals the focal 
 distance of the lens 13 D., which is 77 mm. ; and u 
 equals 15 mm., that is the distance between the nodal 
 point and the retina; we shall then have for our 
 formula — 
 
 77 
 X = -- = ^ tmies. 
 15 
 
 Therefore the enlargement will be five times, and 
 if on measuring the image thus obtained we find it to 
 be 7*5 mm., then we shall know that the real size of 
 the disc was 1*5 mm. 
 
 In hypermetropia we must find the amount of 
 shortening of the eyeball (3 D. = l mm.), and deduct 
 this from the 15 mm. which is the distance between 
 the nodal point and the retina, and then proceed as 
 before. 
 
 In myopia the increase in length of the eyeball 
 must be added on to the 15 mm. 
 
 To carry out this experiment practically a demon- 
 strating ophthalmoscope such as Beale's is necessary, 
 provided with a screen marked out in millimetre 
 squares on which the image is received. With 
 Frost's artificial eye the experiment can be easily 
 demonstrated. 
 
 The large lens used as a condenser and magnifier. 
 — The indirect examination being completed, before 
 
TFIE DIRECT METHOD 53 
 
 laying down the mirror and lens a further method 
 of examination may be briefly mentioned. The ob- 
 server approaching to a short distance from the 
 patient (about 15 or 20 cm.), reflects the light into 
 the eye by means of the mirror, and having illumi- 
 nated the eye he then interposes the convex lens, 
 which is now used not to obtain an image, but to 
 condense the light from the mirror, while at the same 
 time the cornea, iris, and lens are seen under its 
 magnifying influence ; opacities of the cornea, in- 
 juries or affections of the iris or lens are often con- 
 veniently examined in this way ; by slightly moving 
 the lens backwards and forwards the light is focussed 
 on the different planes. This method of examination, 
 though very useful in many cases, must never be 
 used to the exclusion of the focal illumination. 
 
 The Direct Method 
 
 The direct method of examination is next employed. 
 This method has the advantage of enabling us to 
 see the parts in their true position, and gives us an 
 image magnified some 16 to 18 diameters, though, of 
 course, a much smaller part of the fundus is seen at 
 once. The amount of fundus which will be visible 
 depends chiefly upon the size of the pupil, but partly 
 also upon .the size of the light used ; with a pupil 
 of 4 mm. and a large gas flame, one gets a field little 
 bigger than 2 mm. ; although only this small part can 
 be seen at once, yet by varying the position of the 
 head and ophthalmoscope one is able to look over a 
 
54 
 
 THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 consitlorable part of tlie posterior hemisphere of the 
 eye. A strong prism placed behind the ophthalmo- 
 scope will allow a still more peripheral part of the 
 fundus to be seen. 
 
 Fig. 46. 
 
 For the direct examination the tilted short focnssed 
 mirror is used ; it may be quite small, as only those 
 rays reflected from the part immediately around the 
 sight-hole enter the pupil, — this is especially the case 
 when the pupil is small ; the sight-hole should not be 
 larger than about 2J mm., for if the sight-hole be 
 larger than the pupil, then no rays may enter the eye, 
 and we shall fail to get any illuinination. The ob- 
 server first corrects any ametropia that he may have, 
 either by having the proper correction in a suitable 
 clip behind the sight-hole of his ophthalmoscope, or 
 he may deduct his own ametropia from the glass 
 
THE DIRECT METHOD 
 
 55 
 
 which corrects the refraction of the patient and 
 himself in the manner to be presently described ; he 
 
 •S s ^ s 
 
 ^ <i> o ,• o 
 "- ^ ^ o:^ 
 
 2 oj ^ c: o 
 
 -»^ ^ 'fcC « a> 
 _ 3 c tc 
 
 o 2 I -^ g 
 
 > O CI "Vrf r5 
 
 aj o aJ .Sr 
 
 ai gj o. X ... 
 
 ^ S ^ tc^ 
 
 M J K o J 
 >> - 2 "< 
 
 •= p^ fee's 
 ;» C -^-^ '' ^ 
 
 OJ .X "^ > 
 
 "* C (1 > '^ 
 o « O '^ w 
 
 2 »; « ee 
 
 <; c^ ft j; « 'S 
 
 ^ tc 'w 2 2 ?* 
 
 t^ cs 03 *" +^ C> 
 ji* <y S^ ;' 3 ,^ 
 
 C gj fi t, ^j .X 
 »— I > -*J 2 G -^ 
 
 .C o vr O « 
 
 then sits or stands as he may prefer on the same side 
 as the eye he is about to examine, so that the observer 
 
50 THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 uses his right oyo for the patient's right and his left 
 for the patient's left. 
 
 The light is placed on the side to be examined a 
 little behind and on a level with the patient's ear; 
 the examinee's head may with advantage be inclined 
 slightly towards the observer, while the observer 
 inclines his own head slightlj in the reverse direction ; 
 1. e. in examining the right eye the patient iticlines 
 his head slightly to the right, while the observer 
 inclines his slightly to his own right, so that the two 
 eyes may come very close together, the brows even 
 may touch, while the respiratory orifices of patient 
 and observer are away from each other. 
 
 The patient is directed to look straight in front 
 of him, and take as little notice as possible of the 
 examiner,, the surgeon resting the edge of the 
 ophthalmoscope against his brow, reflects the light 
 into the eye, and approaching close to the patient, 
 first looks for the disc; then scans the periphery by 
 directing the patient to look in different directions; 
 and finally examines the macula region. 
 
 The great difficulty which the beginner finds with 
 this method is to keep his accommodation passive ; 
 usually some practice is required before this can be 
 managed, so that a concave glass has to be used 
 before a clear view of the fundus can be obtained. By 
 using a weaker concave glass eadi time, the accommo- 
 dation will be gradually relaxed. Should the disc, 
 when first seen, appear quite clear and distinct, one 
 must not at once assume that the patient is emme- 
 tropic, bnt onl}^ on finding that the weakest convex 
 
THE DIRECT METHOD 
 
 57 
 
 glass behind the oplitlialmoscopc impairs the clear- 
 ness of the image. Another difficult}^ the beginner 
 has, is to disregard the corneal reflex, which is most 
 troublesome when the macula region is inspected. 
 
 Magnification of the image seen by the direct method. 
 — The estimation of the amount of enlargement by 
 means of the direct method of examination is more 
 difficult and less exact than with the indirect method. 
 
 The size of the image of the disc of an emmetrope 
 formed on the retina of the emmetropic observer will 
 be exactly the same size as the disc itself, 
 clearly shown in Fig. 48. 
 
 This is 
 
 KiG. -JS. 
 
 The image is therefore of considerable size, and 
 covers a good many retinal elements ; and to find out 
 the magnification, we have only to consider some 
 external object which^ placed at a certain distance 
 from the eye, forms a retinal image of the same size, 
 viz. 1*75 mm.; half-a-crown held 25 cm. from the 
 eye will produce a retinal image of about this size. 
 
 If we divide the distance nt which the coin is 
 
58 
 
 THE OrnTnALMOSCOPE 
 
 placed (25 cm.) by tlie distance from the retina to 
 the nodal point, 15 mm., we shall arrive at the 
 amount of enlargement : 
 
 25 cm. 250 ram. 
 
 15 mm. 
 
 = 17. 
 
 15 mm. 
 
 The diameter of our coin should therefore be 17 
 times larger than its retinal image ; we know the 
 size of the retinal image is 1*75 mm., therefore the 
 diameter of the half-crown should be about 30 mm. ; 
 on measuring it this will be found to be the case. 
 
 Fig. 49. 
 
 It is obvious that the disc or any part of the fundus 
 will appear more magnified, the greater the distance 
 to which its image is projected. 
 
 Hence the ophthalmoscopic image of the same disc 
 does not alwa^^s appear of the same size to different 
 observers, owing to the varying distance to which 
 the image is mentally projected by them. To still 
 further elucidate the subject, the following explana- 
 tion may be of service. 
 
 Every student is familiar with the plan sometimes 
 
THE DIRECT METHOD 59 
 
 adopted in the case of the microsco}3e ; when making 
 a drawing of a specimen, the observer looks with one 
 eye, we will assume the left, down the tube of the 
 microscope, while with the right he looks by the side 
 of the tube on to apiece of drawing-paper placed on a 
 level with the stage of the instrument. The specimen, 
 seen by the left eye, is projected upon the paper with 
 the right, and can there be drawn ; or if it is wished 
 to estimate the magnifying power of the microscope, 
 a scale divided into hundredths of a millimetre is 
 placed under the eye-piece, while beside it on the 
 stage, or on the same level, is placed a scale divided 
 into millimetres, so that the image seen in this case 
 with the left eye is projected on to the scale placed 
 at the side of the instrument ; thus the two scales 
 are superimposed, and a comparison can be made ; 
 if the squares on the two scales exactly cover each 
 other, then we should know that the microscope mag- 
 nified one hundred times. 
 
 This experiment will also enable anyone to under- 
 stand what is intended by the expression ^^ projecting 
 a retinal image/' 
 
 A somewhat similar plan is adopted with the oph- 
 thalmoscope, but it must be slightly modified since 
 the conditions are different. 
 
 For with the ophthalmoscope, using the direct 
 method, we approach so near to the observed eye 
 that it would be impossible to see it at the same dis- 
 tance with the eye alone ; it is just the same as looking 
 through a strong convex lens. For this reason it is 
 obvious that we must place the standard scale at a 
 
60 
 
 THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 greater distance from the eye, and since the apparent 
 size of the image is larger in proportion to the dis- 
 tance to which it is projected, it is necessary to fix 
 some distance at whicli tlie measuring scale shall be 
 placed so as to render this method of any value; 
 33 centimetres has been decided upon, a distance at 
 whicli we ordinarily look at near objects. 
 
 Therefore, to estimate the amount of enlargement 
 by the direct method of examination, we look with 
 one eye through the ophthalmoscope at the disc of 
 the observed eye, while with the other we look at 
 
 Fig. 50. 
 
 a sheet of paper on which is ruled a millimetre 
 scale placed 33 cm. away ; with a little practice the 
 student will be able to project upon this scale the 
 image of the disc which he sees with the other e^^e, 
 and, by counting the number of squares on the scale 
 
THE DIRECT MKTIIOD 61 
 
 that is covered by the iaiage^ the amount of enlarge- 
 ment can be estimated. 
 
 We encounter here the same difficulty that was re- 
 ferred to on page 51, that the size of the disc may 
 vary in different individuals. 
 
 If the observer be emmetropic, then it is necessary 
 for him to put on —3D. behind his ophthalmoscope, so 
 that he may accommodate 3 D. with each eye ; he 
 wouki then see clearly the disc of the eye under 
 observation, while the other eye will be adapted for 
 the distance at which the scale is placed, 33 cm. ; 
 were this proceeding not adopted, the eyes would have 
 to accommodate in unequal degrees in order that both 
 the disc and the scale may be seen clearly. 
 
 Another plan of estimating the enlargement by 
 the direct method is to place behind the sight-hole 
 of the ophthalmoscope a plain mirror from which a 
 good deal of the silvering has been scratched away, to 
 receive an image of the scale which is placed behind 
 the observer's head and a little to one side, and thus 
 the image of the disc and the scale will be super- 
 imposed, and the two will be seen by the one eye. 
 This plan is useful when the observer's eyes are not of 
 equal value. 
 
 Both the indirect and direct examituitions should 
 always be employed, each method has its own special 
 advantages ; thus the indirect method gives us a large 
 field and allows us quickly to scan over the whole of the 
 posterior part of the fundus, while the patient's re- 
 fraction need not be corrected, and the observer may 
 disregard his own ametropia provided he can adapt his 
 
62 THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 eye for the distance at which the aerial image will be 
 formed. 
 
 The direct method gives a smaller field but greatly 
 magnified, so that minute changes which are not 
 visible by the indirect method can be detected ; it also 
 gives us more accurate information of any lesion with 
 regard to its level, &c., being an upright image every- 
 thing is seen in its proper position, whereas with the 
 indirect method the image is inverted ; and finally with 
 the direct, the refraction of the observer and observed 
 must be corrected. 
 
 To the experienced ophthalmoscopist this becomes 
 an advantage, as an estimate of the patient's refrac- 
 tion can thus be made. One really wishes to estimate 
 the refraction at the macula, but this region is not suit- 
 able, partly because there are no convenient vessels, 
 and partly because it is very sensitive to light, and 
 therefore causes the pupil to contract vigorously, hence 
 one usually selects the disc as the most favorable part 
 for our purpose ; occasionally the refraction at the 
 macula differs considerably from that at the disc, but 
 usually little difference exists. 
 
 The estimation of the refraction by the direct method. 
 — To estimate the refraction of the patient by the 
 direct method, it is necessary that the patient's 
 accommodation should be relaxed; this will generally 
 be the case when the examination is made in a dark 
 room, or atropine may be used ; then if the observer's 
 own accommodation be suspended, and the image of 
 the disc appear quite clear and distinct, the case is 
 one of emmetropia ; because rays coming from an 
 
THE DIRECT METHOD 
 
 63 
 
 emmetropic eye (Fig. 51, e) issue parallel, and the 
 observing eye receiving these rays will, if emmetropic 
 with its accommodation suspended, be adapted for 
 
 Fig. 51. 
 
 parallel rays, so that a clear image of a in the ob- 
 served eye will be formed at h on the retina of the 
 observing eye. 
 
 Supposing the image does not appear clear and 
 distinct without an effort of the accommodation, then 
 we turn on convex glasses behind the sight-hole of 
 the ophthalmoscope. 
 
 The strongest positive glass with which we are able 
 to get a perfectly clear image is a measure of the 
 hypermetropia, because rays coming from a (Fig. 52) 
 
 Ftq. 52. 
 
 in the hypermetropic eye (h) issue in a divergent 
 direction as though coming from u, the punctum re- 
 motum behind the eye. The convex lens (l) renders 
 
64 
 
 TirK OrilTIIALMOSCOPE 
 
 tliein parallel, and they then focus at h^ on the retina 
 of the observing emmetropic eye (e). 
 
 If, however, the image of the disc appear indistinct, 
 and the convex glass, instead of rendering the image 
 clearer, have the opposite effect, we mnst turn the 
 wheel of the ophthalmoscope in the other direction, 
 and so bring forward the concave glasses. The weakest 
 with which we can see the details of the fundus clearly 
 is a measure of the myopia, because any stronger 
 glass merely brings into play the accommodation of 
 the observer. Rays from a (Fig. 53) leave the myopic 
 eye (m) so convergent, tliat they would meet at (li) the 
 punctum remotum. The concave lens (l) renders them 
 parallel before falling on the relaxed eye (e) of the 
 observer. 
 
 Fto. .^3. 
 
 If the ophthalmoscope is not held very close to 
 the eye, we must deduct from the focal distance of 
 the lens the distance between the cornea and the in- 
 strument in hypermetropia, adding them together in 
 myopia. 
 
 If astigmatism exist the proceeding is more difficult, 
 because one wishes to find out not only the refraction 
 of the two chief meridians, but also the axis of these 
 meridians. To discover the meridian of greatest re- 
 
THE DIRECT METHOD 65 
 
 fraction, and to estimate it by the direct method, we 
 keep in view the disc, then if the case be one of hyper- 
 metropic or mixed astigmatism, we find the strongest 
 convex lens thronsrh which one of the vessels still 
 remains distinct (vessels going in other directions 
 will be indistinct) ; this lens will be the measure of 
 the refraction of that chief meridian which is at right 
 angles to the vessel. To estimate the other chief 
 meridian we select a vessel whose course is at right 
 angles to that first chosen, the strongest convex glass 
 through which this vessel is seen distinctly will give 
 us the measure we require. 
 
 Had the case been one of myopic astigmatism, then 
 the weakest concave glass with which any vessel is 
 first clearly defined will indicate the strength of one 
 meridian ; to estimate the other meridian we must as 
 before select a vessel which is at right angles to that 
 first clearly seen, then the weakest concave lens which 
 allows us to see it well defined, will indicate the refrac- 
 tion of the other chief meridian. The estimate is 
 more easy to make, when the chief meridians are 
 vertical and horizontal ; but unfortunately many 
 cases occur in which they are more or less oblique, 
 and it is not always easy to find a vessel whose course 
 exactly coincides with these oblique meridians. 
 
 The essential point to remember in estimating 
 astigmatism by this method is, that the glass with 
 which the vessels in one direction are clearly seen, is 
 the measure of the refraction of that meridian which 
 is at right angles to the vessels ; the student needs 
 only to recall to his mind the principles of the per- 
 
 5 
 
66 THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 ception of a lino by an astigmatic eye to understand 
 this. 
 
 Tlie subject may possibly be made clear by quoting 
 a few examples ; we will take a case in whicli the 
 vertical vessels and lateral sides of the disc appear 
 distinct without any lens, and which the weakest 
 convex glass renders indistinct, then the horizontal 
 meridian, i. e. the meridian at right angles to the 
 vessels clearly seen, is emmetropic ; and suppose, also, 
 that the horizontal vessels with the upper and lower 
 borders of the discs, require a convex or concave glass 
 to render them clear and distinct, then the vertical 
 meridian is hypermetropic or myopic, and the case 
 is one of simple hypermetropic or myopic astigma- 
 tism. 
 
 If both the vertical and horizontal vessels can be 
 seen through a convex glass, but a stronger one is 
 required for the horizontal than for the vertical, then 
 the case is one of compound hypermetropic astig- 
 matism, the vertical meridian being the more hyper- 
 metropic. 
 
 If both meridians had required concave glasses, but 
 of different strengths, then the case would be one of 
 compound myopic astigmatism. 
 
 If the vertical vessels and the lateral sides of the 
 disc can be seen clearly defined through a convex 
 glass, while the horizontal vessels require a concave 
 glass to render them distinct, the case is one of 
 mixed astigmatism, the horizontal meridian being 
 hypermetropic, the vertical meridian myopic. 
 
 The estimation of the refraction by the direct 
 
THE DIRECT METHOD. G7 
 
 method is exceedingly valuable, ])nt requires great 
 practice. lu cases of hypermetropia and low 
 myopia, one is able to estimate the amount of error 
 within half a dioptre, and in cases of astigmatism 
 where the chief meridians are horizontal and ver- 
 tical, one can come very near the exact correction, 
 and without subjecting the patient to the inconveni- 
 ence of having his accommodation paralysed with 
 atropine. 
 
 The comparison of the direct and indirect methods 
 of examination is also very useful in astigmatism. If, 
 for instance, the disc is elongated horizontally in the 
 erect, and oval vertically in the inverted image, we 
 know that the curvature of the cornea is greater in 
 the horizontal than in the vertical meridian. 
 
 The ametropic observer must always remember, 
 when using the direct method for the estimation of 
 errors of refraction, that he must correct his own 
 defect, either by wearing spectacles or by having a 
 suitable glass in a clip behind his ophthalmoscope ; 
 he is then in the position of an emmetrope : but, if he 
 prefer it, he may subtract the amount of his own 
 hypermetropia or myopia from the glass with which 
 he sees clearly the patient's discs. Thus, if the 
 observer have 2 D. of hypermetropia and require +3 
 D. to see the fundus clearly, ( + 3 D.) - ( + 2 D.) = 
 -I- 1 D., the patient would have 1 D. of hypermetropia. 
 Had he required -2D. then (— 2 D.) - ( + 2D.) =: 
 ( — 4D.) the observed would have 4 D. of myopia. 
 
 The same with the myopic observer; if his myopia 
 amount to 3 D., then he will require — 3 D. to see 
 
68 THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 clearly tlio emmetropic fundus ; if he sees well with- 
 out a glass, then the eye under examination has 3 D. 
 of hypermetropia ; if he require a + 2 D., then the 
 hj^permetropia will be 5 D., and so on. 
 
 Retinoscopy 
 
 Retinoscopy, or the shadow test, may conclude our 
 ophthalmoscopic examination ; this is especially neces- 
 sary when the vision has been found defective, and 
 nothing has been detected by the indirect and direct 
 methods. 
 
 Retinoscopy is carried out by means of the large 
 concave mirror used in the indirect method, or by a 
 plane mirror ; the following description refers to the 
 method carried out with the concave mirror. 
 
 The light is placed over the patient's head, and the 
 observer sitting at one and a quarter metres away, 
 reflects the light into the eye he wishes to examine ; the 
 converging rays of light reflected from the mirror 
 focus in front of it, cross and diverge. Some of these 
 rays passing through the pupil of the eye under 
 observation, form a cone of light, which in the case of 
 emmetropia would come to an exact focus on the 
 retina. 
 
 When the observer looks through the sight-hole 
 of the mirror, he will obtain the ordinary red fundus 
 reflex ; on slightly rotating the mirror the illuminated 
 area of the pupil may disappear (or, what may be 
 more easily seen, the edge of the shadow bounding 
 
KETINOSCOPY 
 
 69 
 
 tliis illiuuinated area may appear) on tlio same .side 
 as the rotation or in the opposite direction, according 
 to the refraction of the eye under observation ; thus 
 if the mirror be rotated to the right and the edge of 
 the shadow move across the pupil also to the right, 
 i. e. in the same direction as the rotation of the mirror, 
 the case is one of myopia, whereas if the shadow had 
 moved in the opposite direction to the mirror, the case 
 would be one of hypermetropia. 
 
 If we place before a screen a convex lens, at such 
 a distance from it that converging rays from a con- 
 cave mirror, having crossed and become divergent, 
 are brought to an exact focus, a small, erect, well- 
 defined image will be formed on the screen of the lamp 
 from which the concave mirror received its rays ; 
 erect, because it has suffered two inversions. 
 
 Fig. 54. 
 
 a. The concave mirror, h. The candle, c. The lens. tf. The 
 screen, d. Small image of candle formed on tl>c screen. 
 f. Dense shadow around. 
 
 This image of the lamp is surrounded by a sharply 
 defined and dark shadow. 
 
 If we move the lens nearer to, or further from, the 
 
70 TFIE OrFITlTALMOSCOPE 
 
 screeu, a circle of diffusion and not an accurate image 
 is formed, as shown in Fig. 55. 
 
 Fig. 55. 
 
 At e a suiiill image of the candle is formed; at d and/", circles 
 
 of diffusion. 
 
 The mirror being rotated on its vertical axis, the 
 imnge of the candle, with the surrounding shadow, 
 will always be found to move in the opposite direction 
 to the mirror, whatever be the distance of the lens 
 from the screen. 
 
 Fig. 56. 
 
 31. The mirror, ai'. The mirror after rotation. The ex- 
 tremities of the dotted line have moved iu the opposite 
 direction to the rotation of the mirror. 
 
 This is exactly what takes place in the eye, of which 
 our screen and lens are a representation. 
 
 Therefore the illumination and shadows which we 
 
RETINOSCOPY 71 
 
 see iu retinoscopy are the enlarged image of the lamp 
 with the surrounding shadow, brought more or less 
 to a focus on the retina according to the refraction of 
 the eye. They always move against the mirror, but 
 as these movements are seen through the transparent 
 media of the eye, and thereby undergo refraction, the 
 " apparent " may differ from the "real '* movements. 
 The image we see of the lamp, and its surrounding 
 shadows, are formed in the same manner as all other 
 images. 
 
 In emmetropia the image is formed at infinity; and 
 therefore, at a distance from the eye, the observer 
 sees only a diffused and blurred image (Fig. 34). 
 
 In hypermetropia the final image of the candle and 
 its surrounding shadow, produced by the concave 
 mirror, is an erect one formed behind the e^^e, and as 
 it is viewed through the dioptric system of the eye, it 
 therefore moves against the mirror (Fig. 35). 
 
 In myopia the final image is an inverted one, pro- 
 jected forwards. This, therefore, moves with the 
 mirror, it having undergone one more inversion 
 (Fig. 30). 
 
 Therefore, if the image move with the mirror, the 
 case is certainly one of myopia. If it move against 
 the mirror, it is most likely one of hypermetropia ; 
 but it may be emmetropia, or a low degree of myopia. 
 
 The movements tell us the form of ametropia we 
 have to deal with. The extent of the movements on 
 rotation of the mirror, the clearness of the image and 
 the brightiiess of its edge, enable us to judge approxi- 
 mately the amount of ametropia to be corrected ; 
 
72 
 
 THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 some practice, liowcver, is required befoie we can 
 form au opinion with anything like accuracy. 
 
 The extent and rate of movement is always in 
 inverse proportion to the ametropia ; the greater the 
 error of refraction, the less the movement and the 
 slower does it take place. This may be explained in 
 the following way : 
 
 Suppose A to be the image of a luminous point 
 formed on the retina, and that a line be drawn from A 
 througli the nodal point B to c. Now, if the case be 
 one of myopia (Fig. 57), an inverted projected image 
 
 Fio. 57. 
 
 of A is formed somewhere on this line, say at c. The 
 higher the myopia, the nearer to the nodal point will 
 this image be; and hence we may suppose it formed 
 as near as d. If the mirror be now rotated, so that it 
 takes up the position of the dotted line m', c will have 
 moved to c, and J) to d ; hence it is clear that c has 
 made a greater movement than d. 
 
 Had the case been one of hypermetropia (Fig. 58), 
 the image would have been projected backwards, and 
 as in myopia, the higher the degree of hypermetropia, 
 the nearer to the nodal point is the image formed. 
 
KETINOSCOPY 
 
 73 
 
 In this case, the line from the nodal point b to A is 
 prolonged backwards, and the image of the luminous 
 point in a low degree of hypermetropia is formed, 
 say at c, and in a higher degree, say at i). On moving 
 the mirror into the position of the dotted line m', c 
 moves to c and b to d ; whence it is clear that c has 
 made a greater movement than D. 
 
 Fig. 58. 
 
 Therefore, as the ametropia increases, the extent of 
 the movement of the imaofe decreases. The clearness 
 of the image and the brightness of its edge decrease 
 as the ametropia increases. 
 
 It was shown in Fig. 55, that on placing before a 
 screen a convex lens at such a distance that converg- 
 ing rays from a concave mirror cross and become 
 divergent, they are brought to an exact focus, forming 
 a small, erect, well-defined image on the screen of the 
 lamp from which the concave mirror received its rays. 
 On moving the lens nearer to or further from the 
 screen, the larger becomes the area of light, and the 
 feebler the illumination, owing to the circles of diffu- 
 sion formed on the screen. 
 
 Therefore, in the case of the eye, the greater the 
 
74 THE Ol'HTHALMOSCOrE 
 
 ametropia, the larger is the circle of diffusion and the 
 weaker the illumination, so that the image we see is 
 less bright and its edge less distinct. 
 
 It is, therefore, in the lower degrees of ametropia 
 that we get the brightest and best-defined shadows; 
 and when we thus see them, we may assume that we 
 are approaching the stage of correction. 
 
 The patient, then, being seated in the dark room, 
 the pupils dilated, and the lamp over his head, as 
 before described, we take up our position 120 cm. 
 in front, with a concave mirror of 25 cm. focus. The 
 patient is then directed to look at the centre of the 
 mirror, so that the light from the lamp may be re- 
 flected along the visual axis. On looking through the 
 perforation of the mirror, we get the ordinary fundus 
 reflex, bright if the patient be emmetropic, less so if 
 he be ametropic ; and the greater the ametropia, the 
 less bright will the fundus reflex be. We now rotate 
 the mirror on its vertical axis to the right. If a vertical 
 shadow come across the pupil from the patient's right, 
 i. e. in the same direction as the movement of the 
 mirror, or what is the same thing, if the shadow move 
 in the same direction as the circle of light on the 
 patient's face^ the case is one of myopia. Should 
 the edge of the image appear well defined and move 
 quickly, in addition to a bright fundus reflex, we 
 infer that the myopia is of low degree and proceed to 
 correct it. 
 
 Each eye must of course be tried separately. 
 
 The patient having put on a pair of trial spectacle- 
 frames, we place a weak concave glass, say —ID. 
 
RETINOSCOPY 75 
 
 before the eye we are about to correct. If the image 
 still move with the mirror, we place in the frame 
 — TS D, then —2 D., and so on, until we find the 
 point at which no distinct shadow can be seen. Sup- 
 posing this to be —2 D. and that on trying — 2'5 D. 
 the image move against the mirror, — 2 D. is assumed 
 to be the correcting-glass. This, however, will be 
 found not to be the full correction of the myopia, 
 because, being situated at 120 cm. from the patient, 
 when his far point approaches that distance, we are 
 unable to distinguish the movements of the shadow ; 
 and when the far point of the observed, though not 
 situated at infinity, is still at a greater distance 
 than the observer, we get a shadow moving in the 
 opposite direction. Hence it is customary in cases of 
 myopia to add on —'5 U. to the correcting-glass, aud 
 this would give us —2-5 D. as the proper glass for 
 our case. 
 
 In correcting myopia, it is a convenient and reli- 
 able plan to stop at the weakest concave glass which 
 makes the image move against the mirror^ and put 
 that down as the correcting-glass. 
 
 When the myopia is of high degree, and a strong 
 concave glass has to be used for its correction, the 
 light reflected from the mirror is so spread out by the 
 concave ghiss, that fewer rays pass into the eye, and 
 therefore the illumination is not so good as in other 
 states of refraction. 
 
 Had we obtained a reverse sliaduw, we should then 
 try convex glasses, when, if -f *5 D. neutralised it, we 
 should assume the case to have been one oi low 
 
70 TIIK Ol'irrilALMOSCOI'K 
 
 myopia. Had it required + 1 D. then it would be cue 
 of emmetropia ; above this, bypermetropia. We pro- 
 ceed exactly as before, putting up stronger and 
 stronger glasses, until we are unable to make out the 
 movements of the image. This is assumed to be the 
 correcting-glass, and just as in the above case the 
 myopia was under-corrected, so in this, the byperme- 
 tropia is slightly over-corrected ; and hence it is usual 
 to deduct from this glass + 1 D., or we may stop at 
 the strongest convex glass with which we still get a 
 reverse shadow. 
 
 To sum up, therefore, if the shadow move with the 
 mirror, it is a case of " myopia ; ^^ if against, it may be 
 weak myopia if +*5 D. cause tlie image to move with 
 the mirror ; emmetropia if + 1 D. neutralise it ; 
 bypermetropia if a stronger glass is required. 
 
 The points to be observed are — (1) the direction of 
 the movement of the image, as indicating the kind of 
 ametropia; (2) the rate and amount of movement, (3) 
 the brightness of the edge of the image, and (4) the 
 amount of fundus reflex ; all indicate the degree of 
 ametropia. 
 
 We have taken notice only of the horizontal axis, 
 but any other meridian will, of course, do equally 
 well, if the case be one of bypermetropia or myopia 
 simply. If, however, the case be one of astigmatism, 
 then the refraction of the two chief meridians will 
 differ. 
 
 In astigmatism, the diffusion patch on the retina is 
 more or less of an oval, instead of being cither a 
 small well-defined image of the candle, or a circle, 
 
RETINOSCOPY 77 
 
 according to whether the eye be emmetropic, myopic, 
 or hypermetropic. This oval may have its edges 
 horizontal and vertical ; frequently, however, they 
 are more or less oblique. 
 
 The oblique movements of the shadow are inde- 
 pendent of the direction in which the mirror is 
 rotated. 
 
 This obliquity is produced thus : (Fig. 59) if 
 behind a circular opening, which is to represent the 
 pupil, we place obliquely an oval piece of card, which 
 is to represent the image on the retina ; on moving 
 the card across in the direction o d, it has the appear- 
 ance of moving in the direction o c, at right angles to 
 the edge of the card. Hence the direction of the 
 shadow's movement is deceiving, and its oblique edge 
 is due to the fact that only that edge which coincides 
 in direction with one of the principal meridians is 
 seen well defined by the observer. Therefore the 
 
 Fig. 59. 
 
 apparent movements are always at right angles to the 
 edgfe of the shadow. 
 
 The same takes place in astigmatism, the two chief 
 meridians of which are parallel and perpendicular to 
 
78 THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 the shadows in retinoscopy ; therefore when the edge 
 of the image is oblique, we know at once that the 
 case is one of astigmatism. If, however, it should 
 be liorizontal or vertical, we judge if one shadow be 
 more distinct or quicker in its movements than the 
 other, though we are not always able to say at once 
 that astigQiatism exists. We therefore proceed to 
 correct one meridian. If the shadow move against 
 in all meridians, we first take the vertical, and put 
 up in front of the patient, in a spectacle-frame, 
 convex spherical glasses, until we find the strongest 
 with which the shadow still moves against the mirror. 
 We put this down as the correcting-glass for the 
 vertical meridian, and let us suppose that glass to be 
 -f 2 D. We next take notice of the horizontal meri- 
 dian, and if -f-2D. is also the highest glass with which 
 we still get a reverse shadow, then, of course, we know 
 the case is one of siuiple hypermetropia. But sup- 
 posing the highest convex glass had been + 4 D., we 
 indicate it conveniently thus : 
 
 + 2 D. 
 
 + 4D. 
 
 The case is one of compound hypermetropic astigma- 
 tism, and will require for its correction + 2 D. 
 sphere combined with -f 2 D. cylinder axis vertical. 
 
 We will take another case — that in which the 
 vertical meridian requires —2D. to give a reverse 
 shadow, and the horizontal + 2 D., this being the 
 highest glass with which we still obtain a reverse 
 shadow. Here we have a case of mixed astigmatism 
 
RETINOSCOPY 79 
 
 which can be corrected by a +2 D. sphere combined 
 with — 4 D. cylinder axis horizontal. 
 
 Supposing the axis of the shadow to be oblique, we 
 know at once that astigmatism exists, and we proceed 
 to correct each meridian separately, moving the mirror 
 at right angles to the edge of the shadow, not hori- 
 zontally and vertically. We judge of the amount of 
 obliquity by the eye, and can frequently tell within 
 a few degrees. If the vertical meridian be 20° out, 
 and require for its correction —2 D., and the axis at 
 right angles to this (which will be therefore at 110°) 
 require — 3D., we express it as in Fig. GO, and correct 
 it with sphere —2D. combined with cylinder — ID. 
 axis 20°, the case being one of compound myopic 
 astigmatism. 
 
 Fig. 60. 
 
 Often one is able to put up the cylinder in the 
 spectacle-frame with the exact degree of obliquity. 
 
 Having found the glasses which correct the two 
 meridians, we put up the combination in a spectacle 
 trial frame, and if we now get only a slightly reversed 
 shadow in every direction, the glasses are assumed to 
 be the right ones, and we proceed to confirm it by 
 
80 THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 tryinpf the patient at the distant test typo, making any 
 slight alterations that may be required. 
 
 In most cases it is necessary to dilate the pupils for 
 retinoscopy, the refraction at the macula can then be 
 obtained ; without a mydriatic one would only be 
 able to estimate the refraction at the disc. 
 
 When the plane mirror is used for retinoscopy, then 
 the movements of the shadow are the reverse of those 
 obtained with the concave mirror. 
 
ArPEARANCES OF THE NORMAL FUNDUS 81 
 
 CHAPTER IV 
 
 THE APPEARANCES OF THE NORMAL FUNDUS 
 
 It is essential that the learner should become 
 familiar with the different varieties of the normal 
 fundus before passing on to the various pathological 
 conditions. The beginner may thiuk this a very easy 
 matter, but he will soon discover that it is far 
 from being so ; for instance, in cases of slight indis- 
 tinctness of tlie margin of the disc, it may sometimes 
 be exceedingly difficult for even the most experienced 
 and skilful ophthalmoscopist to know exactly when 
 this slight blurring has passed the border line of 
 health and become pathological. 
 
 As the complexion and the colour of the hair varies 
 greatly in the human race, it is not to be wondered 
 at, that the colour and appearance of the back of the 
 eye, which depend in great measure on the amount 
 of pigment contained in the tissues, should also show 
 great variations. Plates I and II are intended to 
 illustrate some of the types of the normal fundus ; 
 and when we consider that no distinct line separates 
 these different varieties, but that one type passes 
 imperceptibly into another, it will be realised what 
 great differences may be met with. 
 
 6 
 
82 THE OrHTHALMOSCOl'E 
 
 Tlieso variations depend in great measure upon 
 tlie auiouut of pigment eontained in the hexagonal 
 cells of the epithelial layer of the retina, and upon 
 the stellate pigment present in the tissue of the 
 choroid. 
 
 The pigmentation varies greatly in different people, 
 as a rule the lighter the complexion the less pigment 
 is found in the retina and choroid; the albino may 
 be taken as the specimen at one end of the scale, in 
 which the least pigment is found, while the negro 
 represents the other end of the scale,, in which there 
 is the greatest amount" of pigment. Plate I, fig. 2, 
 represents the right fundus of an albino, as seen by 
 the indirect examination; Plate II, fig. 1, the left 
 eye of a very dark English child, seen by the direct 
 method. 
 
 The ordinary red fundus reflex is due to the highly 
 vascular choroid, modified more or less according to 
 the amount of pigment present; the colour and 
 amount of light used will also have much influence 
 on it ; and some variations will be found in different 
 parts of the same eye ; thus the macula region is 
 somewhat darker than the rest of the fundus, shading 
 off gradually into the colour of the other parts. The 
 periphery is usually lighter and may possibly show 
 some of the details of the deeper parts of the choroid ; 
 the colour immediately round the disc may also be 
 somewhat lighter than the general tint of the fundus. 
 
 The retina. — The retina is a membrane of consider- 
 able thickness, being "4 mm. at its posterior and 
 thickest part, where it is four times as thick as the 
 
PLATE I. 
 
 Fig. 1. — Fundus of a child aged 10 years; of medium complexion, 
 light brown hair, grey irides, fair skin. Erect image. Left eye. 
 
 The disc is not so shsirply defined as in many cases ; there is slight 
 pigmentation of the outer edge of the disc, \vhich indicates the edge 
 of the choroidal ring, and may be looked upon as physiological. There 
 is no physiological cup. 
 
 Fig. 2. — Fundus of an albino aged 24; white hair, eyebrows, and 
 eyelashes; irides light grey and translucent. Inverted image. Right 
 eye. 
 
 The absence of pigment is here well shown, each vessel of the deep 
 layer of the choroid can be seen. The disc appears darker than 
 normal, in contrast with the lightness of the rest of the fundus. The 
 light-coloured interspaces between the choroidal vessels are due to 
 the white of the sclerotic. On the outer side of the disc is a slight 
 crescent, caused by the choroidal opening being rather larger than the 
 sclerotic ring, so that a small portion of the sclerotic is here exposed. 
 
Plate!. 
 
 A. W Head del. 
 
 Bale <V Dante Issan, Ltd. 
 
PI ate II. 
 
 iz.e&Ci 
 
 Bale &" Danielsson, Ltd. 
 
PLATE II. 
 
 Fig. 1.— Fumlus of a very dark child aged 10; skin dark, hair 
 black, eyebrows and eyelashes black ; irides dark brown. Erect image. 
 Left eye. 
 
 The striation around the disc is unusually distinct. The stippling 
 of the lamina cribrosa can be seen in the centre of the disc. 
 
 Fig. 2. — Right fundus of a child aged 10 years ; hair dark brown, 
 eyebrows brown, eyelashes black ; irides dark brown. Inverted image. 
 
 The tissue of the choroid contains a large quantity of very dark 
 pigment, which causes the interspaces between the choroidal vessels 
 to appear very dark — much darker than the vessels themselves. The 
 pigment in the epithelial layer of the retina must be of a lighter 
 colour than usual, to allow one to see through it on to the deeper layers 
 of the choroid. There is a well-marked physiological cup present. 
 The halo around the macula is due to reflection. 
 
APPEARANCES OP THE NORMAL FUNDUS 83 
 
 choroid. At the macula^ its thinnest part, it is only 
 •1 mm. thick. The retina anterior to its epithelial 
 layer is transparent : this is necessarily the case^ since 
 it is so constructed, that rays of light entering the 
 eye have to pass through to its deeper parts in order 
 to reach the layer of rods and cones on which images 
 must be formed. In dark-complexioned persons a 
 sort of shimmer or bloom may be sometimes detected, 
 especially in the region of the macula ; occasionally a 
 striated appearance is visible at the upper and lower 
 margins of the disc, spreading a considerable way 
 over the retina. This is due to the nerve-fibres beiup* 
 slightly visible over the part where they are thickest, 
 and is best seen in young hypermetropic children. 
 The case from which Fig. 1, Plate II, was drawn, 
 afforded a good example of this striation. But, 
 speaking generally, the retina^ except for its large 
 vessels, is transparent, so that in most medium or 
 dark complexioned people one looks with the oph- 
 thalmoscope through the retina on to the retinal 
 epithelium, which, if fairly pigmented, allows the 
 red of the choroid to sliiue through, but effectually 
 hides any of the vessels or details, so that one gets 
 a uniform red reflex, often having a slightly granular 
 appearance when viewed by the direct method, 
 due to the pigment contained in the epithelial 
 layer ; this is, perhaps, the commonest type of the 
 normal fundus, and is shown in Fig. 1, Plate I. 
 When the epithelial layer contains but little pigment 
 or pigment of a light colour, as in fair people, then 
 we can see through this layer more or less of the 
 
84 THE OrilTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 details of the choroid ; tlio cjipillaries of the chorio- 
 capilliiris are too small to be seen, but the large 
 choroidal vessels may be fairly distinct, having be- 
 tween them small islands of tissue, which may be 
 lighter than the vessels themselves in very fair indi- 
 viduals, where very little pigmeni} is present in the 
 connective tissue of the choroid (a very striking 
 example of this condition is seen in the albino Fig. 2, 
 Plate I) ; or the interspaces may be darker than the 
 vessels, when a good deal of pigment is present. Fig. 
 2, Plate II : these interspaces are small, triangular, 
 or irregular in shape about tlie disc ; more elongated 
 in the periphery. The details of the choroid are 
 often best seen in the peripher}^, sometimes only 
 there. Thus there are three distinct types of the 
 normal fundus. 
 
 1. The fundus having a slightly granular appear- 
 ance, with no choroidal details visible. Met with 
 chiefly in people of dark complexions, Fig. 1, Plate I, 
 and Fig 1, Plate II. 
 
 2. The fundus, in which the large choroidal vessels 
 are seen with lighter coloured interspaces ; light 
 complexioned people, Fig. 2, Plate I. 
 
 3. The fundus, in which the large choroidal vessels 
 appear with dark coloured interspaces; this is some- 
 times known under the name of " clioroid tigre,'^ 
 and is found in people with medium complexions. 
 Fig. 2, Plate II, is intended to represent this con- 
 dition. 
 
 Though these are the three chief types of the 
 normal fundus, it will be understood that one variety 
 
APPEARANCES OF THE NORMAL FUNDUS 85 
 
 gradually merges into the next, so that every possible 
 variation may be met with. 
 
 In old persons the epithelial layer may become 
 deprived of its pigment, and so allow the deeper 
 parts of the choroid to come into view. 
 
 It must be remembered that the arteries and veins 
 of the choroid cannot be distinguished from each 
 other by the ophthalmoscope. 
 
 The macula lutea, which is the part of most distinct 
 vision, is free from any visible vessels, nevertheless it 
 is exceedingly vascular, the capillary meshes being 
 much closer together than in any other part, except 
 at the fovea centralis, where they are absent. The 
 macula is situated about 2 mm. on the temporal side 
 of the disc and 1 mm. lower; it is directly in the line 
 of vision, and is slightly larger than the disc, being in 
 shape an ill-defined oval with its long diameter hori- 
 zontal ; the colour is darker than the rest of the fundus, 
 and shades off gradually into the general orange red 
 colour. Its centre is marked by a depressed whitish 
 pink spot, ilie fovea centralis. The macula is some- 
 times surrounded by a sort of ring or halo, which is 
 due to reflection from the sloping edge of the depres- 
 sion ; this halo is often seen in dark children with the 
 indirect method, and is shown in Plate II, fig. 2. It 
 requires some practice before this region can be satis- 
 factorily exatnined. The macula never appears yellow 
 with the ophthalmoscope. 
 
 Sometimes a good deal of reflex takes place from 
 other parts of the retina, and is spoken of as a 
 '^ watered silk " appearance ; this reflection takes place 
 
86 THE OPHTrTALMOSCOPE 
 
 from the superficial part of the retina, and shows a ten- 
 dency to run along and over the vessels, shifting with 
 every movement of the mirror ; it is best seen in dark 
 hypermetropic children, and is rare after the age of 
 twenty. The exact cause of this retinal reflex is not 
 known, but it has been suggested that it may be due to 
 minute parallel striations of the cells of the ganglion 
 layer of the retina. 
 
 The optic disc or papilla is the iutra-ocular end of 
 the optic nerve, and consists of nerve-fibres which 
 spread out to form the retina, together with a certain 
 amount of connective tissue, and the central artery 
 and vein of the retina. It is situated a little to the 
 nasal side of the posterior pole of the eye, being a 
 little raised, and usually circular or slightly oval in 
 shape, with its long axis nearly vertical ; its real size 
 is about 1*75 mm., sometimes one side is slightly flat- 
 tened. The anatomically oval disc must not be con- 
 founded with the oval, due to astigmatism ; the 
 diagnosis between the two can easily be made, when 
 using the indirect method, the anatomically oval disc 
 will not alter its shape as the objective is gradually 
 withdrawn, while the astigmatic oval will undergo 
 considerable change in its shape as the convex glass 
 is moved away from the eye. 
 
 The colour of the disc varies much from the rest of 
 the fundus, being considerably lighter ; it also varies 
 at different periods of life, being rather paler in 
 old people. The colour of the disc is due to the 
 combined effect of the nerve-fibres, the blood-vessels, 
 and the connective tissue, the result being a pinkish 
 
APPEARANCES OP THE NORMAL FUNDUS 87 
 
 rose tint ; considerable variations of colour are found 
 in different parts of the disc ; thus the pinkish colour 
 is often most pronounced on the nasal side, while the 
 whitest part of the disc is often its centre aud towards 
 the temporal side ; in many cases the nerve-fibres 
 separate immediately after perforating the lamina 
 cribrosa, leaving a conical depression between them, 
 at the bottom of which is seen the white stippling of 
 this lamina ; this pit is known as the ^''physiological 
 cuj).^' This cup may vary much in size and shape, 
 but alwa3\s has the one characteristic, that it never 
 involves the whole disc, as is the case with the glau- 
 coma cup. The physiological is usually a deep 
 shelving cup, while that due to glaucoma is over- 
 hanging. When the physiological cup is large and 
 deep, its nasal side may be steep or even excavated, 
 but the temporal side has almost invariably a gradual 
 slope, which may extend in this direction to the 
 margin of the disc. Frequently a stippling is seen at 
 the bottom of a deep cup ; this is due to the details 
 and perforations of the lamina cribrosa being visible. 
 Fig. 64 represents a deep physiological cup, and should 
 be compared with the figures illustrating the other 
 two varieties of cupping. Figs. 65 and 66. 
 
 The disc usually has a well-defined margin with 
 some traces of pigment ; this is known as the choroidal 
 ring, and is well shown in Fig. 61 {a) ; though spoken 
 of as an opening, it is not so in the true sense of the 
 word, since fibres pass into the nerve on all sides, 
 and cases occasionally occur in which the choroidal 
 tissue can be traced for some distance on to the face 
 
88 THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 of the nerve ; the edge of the choroidal opening is 
 often slightly larger than the corresponding opening 
 in the sclerotic, and when this is so, a small rim of this 
 coat ma}^ be visible just within the choroidal ring ; this 
 is called the sclerotic or connective-tissue ring (h). The 
 sclerotic ring is often partially hidden by the slight 
 expansion of the optic nerve, after passing through 
 the lamina cribrosa, though usually a trace of it can 
 be seen on the outer side ; so that we have from within 
 outwards ; (1) a white central depression, the physio- 
 logical cup ; (2) surrounded by a zone of a pinkish 
 colour, most marked usually on the nasal side : this 
 zone is composed chiefly of nerve-fibres and their 
 capillaries ; (3) outside this is a well-defined white 
 margin, the sclerotic ring, and, finally, (4) the slightly 
 pigmented margin of the choroidal ring. Great varia- 
 tion will be met with in different subjects ; the discs 
 on the two sides should always be compared. The 
 colour of the different parts of the disc can be best 
 appreciated by the direct examination, and by using 
 only a moderate illumination. The edges of the disc 
 should be clearly defined ; sometimes the upper and 
 lower margins are less distinct than the sides ; this 
 may be due to the nerve-fibres being thickest over 
 these parts ; this condition is most frequently met 
 with in cases of hypermetropia, being then due to an 
 excess of connective tissue about the disc and around 
 the vessels. 
 
 Fig. Gl is a diagrammatical representation of the 
 optic disc ; the choroidal and sclerotic rings are 
 seldom seen in the complete form as here represented, 
 
APPEARANCES OF THE NORMAL FUNDUS 
 
 89 
 
 but it is necessary the student sliould be acquainted 
 with them and know how they are formed ; {a) cho- 
 roidal ring, (h) sclerotic ring, (c) physiological cup. 
 (d) The retina, (e) the choroid, (/) the sclerotic, (r) 
 the central vessels. 
 
 The central artery and vein of the retina are seen 
 issuiug from near the centre of the disc, usually a 
 
 little to the nasal side, the artery being on the inside, 
 the vein on the outside ; they spread out in the 
 nerve-fibre layers of the retina, so that when seen in a 
 microscopical section, they project above the surface 
 of this membrane. The retinal vessels are exceedingl}" 
 small, although, with the direct method, they give one 
 the idea of being of fair size ; the main divisions of the 
 retinal artery may be about '4 mm. in diameter, while 
 
90 THE OPnTFTALMOSCOPE 
 
 the smallest visible vessels will be about 'OG mm.; 
 the capillaries being considerably smaller than this, 
 are necessarily invisible. 
 
 The arteries may be distinguished from the veins 
 (a) by their colour, {h) by their size, and (c) by their 
 general appearance. The vessels are really trans- 
 parent oval tubes, so that it would be more correct to 
 speak of the blood column contained in them. 
 
 The arteries are bright red in colour, about one 
 third smaller than the corresponding veins ; they 
 cross over the veins, and have a marked white central 
 streak. There is some difference of opinion as to the 
 cause of this white streak ; some observers consider 
 it is due to reflection from the column of blood, while 
 others think it is due to the refraction of the ravs of 
 light passing through the vessels and reflected back. 
 
 The veins are darker in colour, larger, and pass 
 under the arteries, the central white streak is less 
 marked and less regular than in the arteries ; fre- 
 quently pulsation may be seen in the veins, or can 
 be easil}^ produced by very slight pressure on the 
 eyeball. 
 
 The main central artery often divides just before 
 emerging from the disc into two branches, a superior 
 and inferior, these again divide into temporal and 
 nasal branches, other branches are given off dichoto- 
 mously ; sometimes the main artery divides on the 
 disc itself. As one would expect, the distribution 
 varies much in different persons, though there is fre- 
 quently great similarity in the circulation of the two 
 eyes. A separate artery is often found on the outer 
 
APPEARANCES OP THE NORMAL FUNDUS 91 
 
 side of the disc curving outwards on to the retina, 
 and fulfilling the functions of a retinal artery ; this is 
 usually a branch of one of the posterior ciliary arteries, 
 and is known as a nlio-retinal vessel. 
 
92 TFTR OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 CHAPTER V 
 
 CORNEA — ANTERIOR CHAMBER — IRIS — LENS 
 
 I HAVE no intention to enter into a discussion on 
 the various diseases which affect the different struc- 
 tures of the eye, but it may be well to refer briefly 
 to the methods recommended for the examination of 
 each part in a systematic manner, while at the same 
 time the ophthalmoscopic appearances indicative of 
 disease of the various tissues of the eyeball may be 
 shortly described. 
 
 The cornea. — The cornea is the most important ex- 
 ternal part of the eye, and its prominent position 
 renders it especially liable to accident : the chief 
 pathological conditions from which this tissue may 
 suffer usually produce some alteration in its curvature 
 or some loss of transparency ; these changes are 
 almost invariably accompanied with a diminution of 
 vision, together with other symptoms. 
 
 The focal illumination is of tlie greatest value in 
 the examination of the cornea, — with it, everything will 
 be seen in its true position and of its proper colour ; 
 foreign bodies such as chips of metal, particles of coal, 
 &c., frequently become embedded in this tissue and 
 
THE CORNEA 93 
 
 may easily escape detection when small, unless great 
 care is exercised; nebula3, irregularities, ulcers of 
 various kinds, — opaque, transparent, shallow, deep, 
 &c., — are very frequently met with. The curvature 
 of the cornea, may be mucli altered, as in conical 
 cornea ; this will best be seen in profile. Vessels may 
 be found on tlie surface as in panuus or phlyctenular 
 keratitis, or in the tissue of the cornea itself as in 
 interstitial keratitis (in this condition it is not possible 
 to distinguish the separate vessels, which are often 
 closely grouped together, forming what is known as a 
 "salmon patch ^'). Keratitis punctata may also be 
 detected by focal illumination; it consists of small 
 particles of lymph deposited on the posterior part of 
 the cornea, these small dots increase somewhat in 
 size by proliferation of the epithelium ; frequently the 
 spots are arranged in the shape of a pyramid, with 
 the apex to tlie centre of the cornea and the base 
 downwards. The focal illumination may frequently 
 be supplemented with advantage by the high magni- 
 fying glass (Fig. 33). 
 
 This examination having been extended to the ante- 
 rior chamber, iris, and lens, the large concave mirror 
 is next taken up, and light reflected into the eye from 
 a distance of half a metre; corneal opacities will now 
 appear as black spots in the red of the fundus, due 
 to the interruption of the returning rays of light 
 from the back of the eyeball. In conical cornea a 
 central illumination will be seen with the mirror, 
 surrounded by a dark, circular shadow, corresponding 
 to the base of the cone. On moving a little further 
 
94 THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 back, so as to use retinoscopy, tlie shadow will be 
 found to liavo a circular nioveniont. Finally the 
 corneal examination may be completed by using the 
 direct method, having behind the sight-hole of the 
 ophthalmoscope + 20 D. and approaching close to the 
 patient. By this means the various opacities may be 
 seen in detail. vSometimes a number of line arbo- 
 rescent lines may be detected; these are the trans- 
 parent remains of vessels which are left as permanent 
 evidence of previous keratitis. 
 
 Aqueous chamber and iris. — In some cases with the 
 oblique illumination the contents of the aqueous 
 chamber may be seen to be muddy; this is due to 
 inflammatory material poured out in iritis or cyclitis ; 
 here the apparent colour of the iris may be altered, 
 or the contents of the aqueous chamber being quite 
 transparent, the surface of the iris may be seen to be 
 dull, discoloured, and indistinct, the result of inflam- 
 matory exudation into its tissue ; sometimes the exuda- 
 tion forms a distinct gumma. Blood may be found in 
 the lower part of the anterior chamber and is spoken 
 of as hyjyhsema, it is usually due to a blow or iritis ; a 
 collection of leucocytes may also take place, forming 
 hyjpojoyon, the cause of which may be iritis or a spread- 
 ing corneal ulcer. When perforation of the cornea 
 has taken place, adhesions between the cornea and iris 
 may form [anterior tsynechiai) . Points of adhesion be- 
 tween the iris and lens may be detected (posterior 
 synechias). Sometimes one or two fibres may be seen 
 crossing the anterior chamber from one point of the 
 iris to another ; these fibres arise not from the extreme 
 
TEE LENS 
 
 95 
 
 pupillary edge, but from the junction of the radiating 
 and circular fibres ; these fibres are the remains of the 
 pupillary membrane which existed during intra- 
 uterine life. Perforation of the iris from a penetrat- 
 ing wound may be readily detected with the oblique 
 illumination, and with the mirror the red reflex will 
 be seen through the opening, in these cases the lens 
 is usually wounded and soon becomes opaque; the 
 iris may have become more or less detached from its 
 ciliary border {irldodialy^in), as the result of a violent 
 blow. Atrophy of the iris and growths of the iris or 
 ciliary body may also be conveniently examined by 
 these means ; finally, the iris may be examined with 
 the ophthalmoscope, having a +10 D. behind the 
 sight-hole. Foreign bodies may occasionally be de- 
 tected in the anterior chamber, and now and then a 
 cilium is carried into this chamber by a perforating 
 body. 
 
 The lens. — To examine the lens thoroughly, the pupil 
 must first be dilated with homatropine and cocaine 
 (p. 32). The examination should be commenced with 
 the focal illumination ; and here a word of warning is 
 necessary — do not be too hasty to assume that the 
 lens is becoming opaque. This mistake is very 
 liable to be made by the inexperienced, especially 
 when light from a window is concentrated on the eye 
 with the biconvex lens. The reason of this apparent 
 opacity is, that as nge advances, the lens becomes 
 harder, so that a good deal of reflection takes place 
 from the anterior surface of the lens, and gives some- 
 what the appearance of diffuse opacity. 
 
96 THE OPUTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 With the oblique illuniiuation opacities of the lens 
 appear in their true colour, spots of pigment may be 
 detected on the anterior capsule, and are evidence of 
 previous iritis; the iris has been adherent to the lens 
 at these points, and when the synechiaa was torn away 
 by a mydriatic the pigment was left attached to the 
 lens ; pigment in this position may increase by proli- 
 feration. 
 
 Anterior polar and pyramidal cataract may easily 
 be detected; the latter variety is usually due to the 
 cornea having been in contact with the lens owing to 
 perforation having taken place during an attack of 
 infantile purulent ophthalmia, a nebula may often be 
 seen in the cornea at the point where perforation took 
 place; anterior polar cataract may occasionally be 
 connected with the remains of the pupillary membrane. 
 Cortical, central, and posterior polar opacities may 
 also be seen, but when examining the latter the light 
 must be directed into the eye almost at right angles to 
 the cornea. Posterior polar cataract is frequently con- 
 genital, and may be connected with the remains of the 
 hyaloid artery ; at other times it may be secondary 
 to disease of the fundus, such as retinitis pigmentosa, 
 &c. Lamellar is a variety of cataract which is usually 
 congenital, and consists of a layer of opaque lens sub- 
 stance included between a clear nucleus and cortex. 
 This can be well examined by focal illumination 
 through a well dilated pupil. 
 
 The examination by focal illumination being com- 
 pleted, the ophthalmoscope mirror is next taken up, 
 and affords us valuable information as to the amount 
 
THE LENS 
 
 97 
 
 of opacity present ; the opacities in this method of 
 examination show up as black spots, patches, or stria?, 
 against the ordinary red of the fundus, the return- 
 ing rays of light being interrupted by the opaque 
 portions of the lens. In lamellar cataract the opacity 
 will appear denser at the margin of the opaque portion 
 than it does in the centre. Finally the lens may be 
 inspected with the direct method, having a -f 16 D. 
 behind the sight-hole of the instrument. 
 
 Sometimes it is difficult by focal illumination to 
 make out the exact position of a fixed opacity in the 
 anterior part of the eyeball ; we may then employ the 
 concave mirror and notice the displacement which the 
 opacity makes with regard to the pupil when we move 
 our head slowly from one side to the other. Thus 
 
 Fig. 62. 
 
 supposing, as in Fig. 62, we have three opacities all 
 situated on the optic axis, A an opacity on the cornea, 
 B one on the anterior surface of the lens, and c one at 
 the posterior pole, then it is clear that the observer 
 looking along the optic axis will see these spots exactly 
 
 7 
 
98 THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 in the centre of the pupil, as at 1. If the observer 
 now move his eye from 1 to 2, the position of the 
 points with relation to the pupil will have changed^ 
 opacity A will have moved towards the upper margin 
 of the pupil, opacity b will still be in the centre, 
 while opacity c will be nearer the lower edge of the 
 pupil. 
 
 Therefore we may state the following rule, that if 
 we look into the eye from directly in front, and the 
 opacity remains stationary when we move our head 
 to one side (the patient's eye being fixed), then we 
 know the opacity must be in the same plane as the iris, 
 probably the anterior surface of the lens ; had it been 
 on the cornea, then it would appear to move in the 
 opposite direction to the movement of the head ; had 
 it been at the posterior pole, then it would appear to 
 move in the same direction as the observer's head. 
 The quicker the movement that takes place, the further 
 is the opacity from the plane of the iris. 
 
THE VITREOUS *^ 99 
 
 % 
 
 
 t 
 
 CHAPTEE YI 
 
 THE VITREOUS 
 
 The two chief indications of disease of the vitreous 
 are loss of trans'parenQXj and diminished consistency. 
 The focal illumination is sometimes useful in detect- 
 ing disease in the anterior part of the vitreous, but to 
 use this method to the best advantage it is necessary 
 to dilate the pupil and to place the light in front of 
 the patient, so that the rays may be concentrated on 
 the part we wish to examine, almost at right angles 
 to the cornea (Fig. 32). In this way blood, Inrge 
 vitreous opacities, or even the crystals of cholesterine 
 in sparkling synchysis maybe detected when near the 
 posterior surface of the lens ; a growth or a detached 
 retina projecting a long way forward may occasion- 
 ally be seen. This method of examination has the 
 distinct advantage of allowing things to be seen in 
 their proper colour and in their true position ; but, 
 as a rule, much fuller information will be gained by 
 the ophthalmoscope mirror, though the examination 
 of the cornea and lens by the focal illumination 
 should always extend to the vitreous before taking up 
 the mirror. 
 
100 THE OTHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 If no fundus reflex is obtained with the concave 
 mirror at a distance^ "svhen the light is properly 
 directed into the eye under observation, then the case 
 is probably one of profuse ha3morrhage into the 
 vitreous, presupposing, of course, that the cornea, 
 aqueous, and lens are transparent. 
 
 Vitreous opacities when of fair size are readily seen 
 with the large concave mirror; the patient should 
 be directed to look quickly upwards, then downwards, 
 and finally straight in front of him ; this movement 
 will stir up any opacities which may have gravitated 
 to the lower part of the vitreous chamber. When the 
 opacities are very fine and difficult to see, a plane 
 mirror and a subdued light may be an advantage. 
 
 Usually these opacities are floating, moving with 
 every movement of the eye, and continuing to do so 
 after the eye has come to rest; but sometimes the opaci- 
 ties may be fixed. They vary much in shape, size, 
 and position, sometimes being exceedingly small like 
 dust, and may require some trouble to detect them ; 
 at other times they are large and membranous, or in 
 shreds, or resembling the wings of insects. Their 
 rate of movement will give us some idea of the con- 
 sistency of the vitreous : when they move very quickly 
 the vitreous must be abnormally fluid; should the 
 opacity float very slowly across the field, then its con- 
 sistency may not be diminished. 
 
 These opacities may be — (1) Inflammatory exuda- 
 tion from one of the surrounding vascular structures, 
 as the choroid, or ciliary body. (2) Haemorrhage 
 from the retina, choroid, or ciliary body. (3) Coagu- 
 
THE VITREOUS 101 
 
 latioii of the albuminous eleineuts of the vitreous 
 itself. 
 
 When the opacities are very fine, they may simply 
 cause a slight blurring of the details of the fundus, 
 which may easily be mistaken for papillitis. These 
 very fine opacities should be looked for with the 
 direct method of examination having a + 8 D. behind 
 the sight-hole ; they can usually be best seen against 
 the lighter coloured background of the disc. To 
 thoroughly examine every part of the vitreous the 
 observer must vary his distance from the patient as 
 well as the strength of the lens behind the ophthal- 
 moscope ; the stronger the lens used the more for- 
 ward will the vitreous opacity be. Fine opacities 
 are generally due to the migration of cells accom- 
 panying the exudation of inflammatory material of a 
 serous character from some part of the adjacent uveal 
 tract. When haemorrhage takes place into the vitreous, 
 or the exudation is rich in fibrin, the opacities are 
 liable to be large and membranous, and may, if very 
 numerous, prevent any details of the fundus from 
 being seen. 
 
 Opacities usually appear as black spots, whatever 
 their real colour may be, owing to the interruption to 
 the returning light, unless they happen to be partially 
 transparent, when they Avill appear grey. Sliould 
 they reflect light from their surface, as do crystals of 
 cholesterine and tyrosin, then they may spaikle like 
 particles of gold-leaf. A beautiful illustration of 
 this condition may be occasionally seen, and goes by 
 the name of sparkling synch ysia ; it is a degenerative 
 
102 
 
 rnE OrilTIIALMOSCOPE 
 
 process, usually accompanied by great fluidity of the 
 vitreous. 
 
 In making a diagnosis of opacities in the vitreous, 
 corneal and lenticular affections should first be ex- 
 cluded by focal illumination ; the position of any 
 opacity may be judged of partly by its direction and 
 amount of movement, and partly also by the convex 
 glass through which it can best be seen. 
 
 To estimate the depth of any fixed opacity, we 
 illuminate the eye by the concave mirror at a distance ; 
 then, if the patient be directed to look upward, it will 
 be obvious that any opacity situated in front of the 
 point round which the eye turns (a. Fig. 63), will also 
 move upward, while if the opacity be behind this point, 
 it will move downward ; and the farther the opacity is 
 from the point of rotation, the greater will its move- 
 ment be, and therefore the deeper will be the position 
 of the body. A glance at the following drawing will 
 
 Fig. 63. 
 
 make this clear, a is the centre of rotation of the eye, 
 B is an opacity on the anterior surface of the lens, 
 
THE VITREOUS. 103 
 
 which on uiovement of the eye upwards will move 
 with it to b'; c and d are vitreous opacities, which, 
 being situated behind A, will move in the opposite 
 direction to the eye, so that on turning the eye 
 upwards c will move to c', and D to d'; since d is deeper 
 than c, D will have made a greater change in its posi- 
 tion than c. 
 
 The real movement, therefore, which fixed opacities 
 in the media make is with the eye when the opacities 
 are in front of the centre of rotation, and in the re- 
 verse direction when behind tliis centre. Some 
 practice is required to enable one to correctly inter- 
 pret what is seen, because with an undilated pupil 
 when a point some distance behind the iris but in 
 front of the centre of rotation is watched while the 
 eyeball is moved in different directions, this point may 
 have the appearance of going against the movement 
 of the eyeball though really with it ; this is owing to 
 the greater displacement of the iris, as explained on 
 page 97. 
 
 Foreign bodies, such as chips of metal, may some- 
 times be seen in the vitreous more or less covered 
 with lymph according to the time which has elapsed 
 since the accident. Now and then a few air-bubbles 
 are carried in with the foreign body, which the ob- 
 server might easily mistake for the foreign body itself 
 unless aware of this possibility; air-bubbles are round, 
 reflect light from their centies, and have dark mar- 
 gins, whereas the reflex from a foreign body is chiefly 
 from its edges. 
 
 In the case of a perforating wound, a streak of 
 
104 THE OrHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 opacity may be seen extending through the vitreous 
 along the line taken by the penetrating substance. 
 I have seen cases where after a puncture of this kind 
 the vitreous has remained clear for several days, then 
 gradually an opaque line has formed, become more 
 marked each day, and leading eventually to shrinking 
 of the vitreous. Here, probably, some bacilli have 
 been introduced by tlie perforating body, and finding 
 the vitreous a suitable medium, have undergone 
 proliferation and growth. 
 
 Occasionally some remains of the hyaloid artery 
 may be seen floating about in the vitreous, one end 
 being attached to the disc, while the other end may 
 or may not be connected with the posterior surface of 
 the lens. 
 
 A rare condition is one in which new vessels may 
 be formed in the vitreous as a result of inflammation 
 or large vitreous hasmorrhage ; these vessels are more 
 or less supported by connective tissue, and when met 
 with are usually found in cases with a history of 
 syphilis ; retinitis proliferans is the name given to 
 this condition. 
 
THE CHOROID 105 
 
 CHAPTER VII 
 
 THE CHOROID 
 
 The important part taken by tlie cboroid in the 
 ophtlialmoscopic picture of the fundus lias already 
 been fully described in Chapter IV. Variations from 
 the normal produced by disease of this structure are 
 frequently met with, and produce very various and 
 striking ophthalmoscopic appearances. 
 
 These alterations may display themselves as — 
 
 1. Changes in colour, pigmentation and level, due 
 
 to inflammatory exudation. 
 
 2. Atrophic patches and scars, the permanent 
 
 results of previous mischief. 
 
 3. Haemorrhages from one of the choroidal vessels. 
 
 Hyperaemia of the choroid, though probably fre- 
 quently present, is not recognisable with the ophthal- 
 moscope. 
 
 The choroid, owing to its great vascularity, is espe- 
 cially prone to inflammation; the term churoidititi 
 must be accepted in its widest sense, to include not 
 unly those cases in which the inflammation is in 
 actual progress, but others in which all inflammatory 
 symptoms have long subsided, and of which we have 
 
10(3 THK OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 puruuineut evidence in the shape of atrophic patches, 
 and spots variously pigmented, as well as those cases 
 which from the very first present more of the cha- 
 racters of an atrophy than an inflammation, as in 
 senile and myopic choroiditis. 
 
 Choroiditis may be divided into — 
 Plastic, 
 Suppurative. 
 
 Plastic choroiditis commences as an exudation into 
 the substance of the choroid. The exudations are 
 cellular in character ; they are generally numerous, 
 with a tendency to occur in patches or spots scattered 
 over the fundus. They can be seen with the ophthal- 
 moscope as pink-yellowish coloured spots, slightly 
 raised and with soft-looking edges ; they are beneath 
 the retinal vessels, and may appear in every possible 
 shape, but most frequently tend to the circular. 
 
 In some cases when the deeper part of the choroid 
 is primarily affected, and where no disturbance of the 
 retinal hexngonal epithelium has taken place, nothing 
 may be detected with the ophthalmoscope ; but sooner 
 or later this layer becomes involved, the epithelium 
 undergoes atrophy, and the pigment being set free 
 proliferates and travels forward into the retina, 
 accumulating there into spots having all the cha- 
 racteristics of retinal pigmentation, very like retinitis 
 pigmentosa, which will be referred to on page 122. 
 When the retinal epithelium is thus involved in the 
 inflammatory process, the condition may be spoken 
 of as Ghoroido-retinitis. 
 
 When the inflammatory symptoms are marked, 
 
PLATE III. 
 
 FiQ., 1.— Choroiditis iu the exudative stage. Some of the patches are 
 of fair size, others are very small; uo pigmentation hai taken place 
 when the drawing was made, though it occurred some months later ; 
 the vitreous was full of fine opacities, which rendered the disc margins 
 very indistinct. The patient was a man of about 30 years of age, with 
 a very definite history of syphilis. Both eyes were affected. 
 
 Fig. 2. — Disseminated choroiditis in a child of 12, with the facial 
 characteristics and notched upper incisor teeti of inherited syphilis. 
 
 Fia. 3. — Senile chiuiges in an old man : there has been absorption 
 of the epithelial layer of the retina, witli great thinning of the super- 
 ficial layers of the choroid ; these changes allow the deeper vessels of the 
 choroid to be seai in detail. The vessels of this layer have un lergone 
 considerable sclerosis. 
 
 Fia. 4.— Coloboma of the choroid. The disc is very oval horizon- 
 tally ; the retinal vessels pass over the coloboma without interruption. 
 
Plate III. 
 
 Pi^.l, 
 
 Pi6 2. 
 
 Fi^3 
 
 Fi^4. 
 
 HaU A^ Danielsson, Ltd. 
 
THE CHOROID 107 
 
 vitreous opacities are usually present, and will 
 more or less veil the appearances of the choroidal 
 mischief : in some acute cases no details of the 
 fundus can be made out owing to the number and 
 density of the vitreous opacities, and it may only 
 be after these have partially cleared up that the 
 patches of choroiditis come into view. So that in 
 all cases of choroiditis, vitreous opacities must be 
 carefully looked for with the direct method and a 
 + 8 D. glass behind the sight-hole of the ophthalmo- 
 scope, as described on page 101. 
 
 As the inflammatory symptoms diminish, the exu- 
 dation undergoes absorption together with destruc- 
 tion of the affected portions of the choroid, so that 
 ultimately a white patch or scar remains, surrounded 
 or dotted over more or less with pigment, and fre- 
 quently involving the retina in the cicatrix. The 
 pigment in many of these cases has two sources : first 
 and chiefly, the pigment cells contained in the tissue 
 of the choroid ; second, the pigment which has escaped 
 from the epithelium. The white patches are the 
 bare sclerotic, and may be described as patches of 
 choroidal atrophy. The time occupied from the com- 
 mencement of the exudative stage of choroiditis to 
 that of complete atrophy of the patches may extend 
 over many montlis, or even years; and when it is 
 reniembered tliat the disease gives no external sign 
 of its presence, and produces no subjective symptoms 
 so long as the retina and vitreous are not implicated, 
 and then makes itself known to the patient only by 
 the impairment of vision which results, it will not be 
 
108 THE ornTiiALMoscoi'E 
 
 surprising that the mischief may have been in progress 
 a long time before it is detected, so that the ophthal- 
 moscopic appearance may vary very greatly according 
 to the stage and extent of the disease. Any part of 
 the choroid may be the seat of inflammation ; some- 
 times the periphery is chiefly affected, while in others 
 the region of the macula is alone involved. 
 
 One of the great difficulties that beset the beginner 
 is to decide whether a patch of exudation is in the 
 retina or choroid. When a patch of exudation is seen 
 surrounding or covering up one of the retinal vessels, 
 then it is certainly in the anterior part of the retina : 
 as a rule retinal exudations are whiter in colour than 
 choroidal, and have very soft-looking edges, with little 
 or no pigmentation. Experience alone can teach us 
 to arrive at a correct conclusion ; in some cases it is 
 difficult for the most expert observer to assert posi- 
 tively the exact situation of a given patch. 
 
 In the case of patches of pigment or hasmorrhage 
 the diagnosis is not so difficult ; retinal pigmentation 
 and haemorrhages usually have distinct retinal cha- 
 racteristics, which will be referred to on page 122. 
 
 Purulent choroiditis is usually due to septic emboli 
 in the choroidal vessels, and may sometimes be detected 
 by focal illumination ; as the purulent exudation 
 makes its way forward from the back of the fundus 
 violent inflammatory symptoms set in, the eye becomes 
 tense, and the cornea hazy^ so that little can be seen. 
 
 In young children this condition may run a very 
 chronic course, when the appearances might be mis- 
 taken for glioma (see p. 134). 
 
THE CHOROID 109 
 
 The clinical varieties of choroiditis usually recog- 
 nised by the ophthalmoscope are — 
 
 Disseminated choroiditis^ 
 
 Central choroiditis, 
 
 Myopic clioroiditisy 
 
 Senile choroiditis, 
 though many cases present mixed characters. 
 
 Disseminated choroiditis (Plate III, figs. 1 and 2) is 
 perhaps the most common variety of the disease, and 
 commences as a number of small spots or circular 
 patches of exudation which are scattered over the 
 fundus, chiefly in the periphery ; as the inflammatory 
 exudation becomes absorbed, the tissue of the choroid 
 becomes atrophied and destroyed, leaving circular 
 patches of bare sclerotic, surrounded more or less by 
 pigment. These spots of choroidal atrophy frequently 
 have a shai'ply defined and punched-out appearance, 
 with pigment surrounding them like a collar : in some 
 cases no white patches are seen, but spots of pig- 
 ment surrounded by a lighter margin; at other times 
 the patches may run together, forming one large 
 patch. 
 
 Usually both eyes are affected, though frequently 
 the mischief is further advanced in one eye than in 
 the other. Syphilis, either acquired or inherited, is 
 almost invariably the cause of this form of choroiditis ; 
 the only distinction that can be made with the ophthal- 
 moscope is, that usually there is a greater amount of 
 pigment present in the inherited form of the disease. 
 Vitreous opacities are frequently met with during the 
 exudative stage, and are then generally of a fine dust- 
 
110 THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 like character, slightly blurring the general details 
 of the fundus. 
 
 The degree of impairment of vision depends chiefly 
 upon the situation of the patches ; when confined to 
 the periphery it may be but little affected. 
 
 Central choroiditis. — In central choroiditis the mis- 
 chief is chiefly limited to the yellow-spot region. 
 There are several varieties of the disease ; in some the 
 changes are of a gross character, while in others they 
 are so extremely fine that they can only be seen by 
 the direct method of examination, and may even 
 then be easily overlooked unless the greatest care is 
 exercised. 
 
 In a few cases the appearances are such as would 
 suggest that an inflammatory exudation had taken 
 place at the macula, that it had afterwards become 
 absorbed, and with it most of the choroidal tissue in 
 which it was situated, leaving a considerable interval 
 between the retina (which in these cases may be 
 rendered visible by the pigment on its surface) and 
 the sclerotic : the retina may or may not be perfo- 
 rated. The ophthalmoscopic evidence of this interval 
 is supplied by the parallax produced, and by the dif- 
 ferent lens necessary to focus first the retina and 
 then the sclerotic. 
 
 Patients with central choroiditis often complain that 
 objects appear distorted (metamorphopsia) ; this is 
 due to displacement and separation of the cones. 
 Central vision is usually very defective, and when the 
 retina is much implicated a positive scotoma results. 
 
 Myopic choroiditis. — Choroiditis is exceedingly 
 
THE CHOROID 111 
 
 common in high myopia ; besides the congestion and 
 thinning of the choroid, which takes place with tlie 
 formation of a large crescent and posterior sta{)hy- 
 loma, mischief is apt to begin in independent centres, 
 frequently in or about the macula, and often compli- 
 cated with choroidal haemorrhages ; the patient 
 usually complains of great impairment of vision, 
 together with metamorphopsia and general discomfort 
 of the eyes. 
 
 Senile choroiditis (Plate III, fig. 3) occurs in several 
 varieties; in one kind the changes are chiefly con- 
 fined to the superficial layers of the choroid, with 
 atrophy of the epithelial layer of the retina, affecting 
 the parts immediately around the disc or extending 
 over tlie greater part of the fundus. Seen by the 
 ophthalmoscope the choroidal vessels are unusually 
 distinct, with thickening of their sheaths ; some of the 
 epithelial pigment which has been set free may travel 
 forward into the retina ; the disease is usually sym- 
 metrical in the two eyes; vision is much reduced, 
 and is generally worse at night. In another variety 
 of senile choroiditis a central patch of an irregular or 
 circular form takes place at the macula of each e\'e, 
 producing a scotoma ; this variety of the disease 
 shows but little tendency to spread, so that althouo-ji 
 central vision is lost, absolute blindness is not to be 
 feared. 
 
 A third form of senile central choroiditis is that 
 in which a number of very small whitish-yellow spots 
 may be seen at the macula, with but little or no dis- 
 turbance of pigment ; they can be detected only by 
 
112 THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 the direct method of examination. These spots evi- 
 dently invade the retina, so that central vision is 
 defective. 
 
 Atrophy of the choroid. — One frequently meets with 
 cases in high myopia, and also in old people as a 
 senile change, in which the chorio-capillaris together 
 with the epithelial layer of the retina have undergone 
 almost complete atrophy, producing a very distinctive 
 ophthalmoscopic picture, allowing the vessels of the 
 deep layer of the choroid to come very clearly into 
 view, somewhat resembling those normal light- 
 coloured fundi of which the albino is so striking an 
 example. In the senile condition of atrophy of the 
 choroid the walls of the large vessels are usually 
 thickened. In many of these cases the retina would 
 seem to be included in the atrophic changes leading 
 to deterioration of vision. 
 
 Choroidal haemorrhages are not so frequent as re- 
 tinal; they are usually large, somewhat irregular, and 
 of a diffused character, and the retinal vessels will be 
 seen passing over them ; they are never flame-shaped, 
 as is the case with haemorrhages taking place in the 
 nerve-fibre layer of the retina. The most frequent 
 cause is a blow on the eyeball, but they are also met 
 with in high myopia. These choroidal haemorrhages 
 frequently leave behind them scars which are not to 
 be distinguished from those left by choroiditis. 
 
 The myopic crescent is commonly formed in medium 
 and high degrees of myopia, and is due to the choroid 
 being dragged away from the margin of the disc 
 together with a certain amount of choroidal atrophy ; 
 
THE CHOROID 113 
 
 tlie crescent is almost invariably found on the temporal 
 side of the disc ; sometimes it completely surrounds 
 the disc, but even then its greatest breadth is usually 
 at the outer side. In high myopia, where a large 
 posterior staphyloma is present, a good deal of thin- 
 ning of the choroid may take place, the retinal epi- 
 thelium may be more or less atrophied, and in 
 addition to all this some horizontal markings may be 
 seen midway between the disc and yellow spot ; these 
 are probably slight tears in the superficial part of the 
 choroid and pigment layer of the retina. The myopic 
 crescent will be again referred to on page 147. 
 
 Rupture of the choroid occasionally takes place as 
 the result of a severe blow on the eye ; the rupture 
 is usually curved, with the concavity towards the disc. 
 When the case is seen early, the details of the rupture 
 are usually hidden by the haemorrhage that has taken 
 place ; later, a white curved scar will be seen having 
 pigmented edges. The degree of impairment of vision 
 of course depends upon the situation of the rupture, 
 and when near the macula it may be very great. 
 
 Tubercle of the choroid may occur either in the 
 miliary form or as a large tubercular mass; though 
 not very frequently met with, it probably often exists 
 undetected in cases of tuberculosis. The disease ap- 
 pears in small white or yellowish-white spots, some- 
 what raised; sometimes several spots become confluent, 
 forming a mass as large as or larger than the disc. 
 
 Coloboma of the choroid (Plate III, fig. 4) is a con- 
 genital condition occasionally met with, and, unless 
 the student is aware of its existence, he will be 
 
 8 
 
114 TUE OPIITHALMOSCOrE 
 
 sure to confound it with some serious pathological 
 condition. 
 
 Coloboina of the choroid is due to imperfect closure 
 of the foetal ocuhir cleft ; it always occurs downwards, 
 and maybe associated with a similar defect of the iris, 
 lens, or ciliary body. The coloboma may vary much 
 in size, being usually very white with variations in the 
 colour at different parts, owing to irregularities of the 
 sclerotic ; sometimes there is considerable bulging 
 outwards of the part. The retinal vessels may be 
 seen coursing across the white area; when the colo- 
 boma extends up to the edge of the disc, the latter is 
 usually misshapen, being more or less of a horizontal 
 oval. 
 
 Colloid disease of the choroid. — Occasionally small 
 transparent bodies may be found growing from some 
 part of the choroid, especially in eyes that have been 
 affected with choroiditis ; these bodies may occur as 
 minute separate spots or arranged in a group ; each 
 spot grows from the lamina vitrea, at first pushing 
 forward the retinal epithelium, which gradually 
 undergoes atrophy, and finally allows the most promi- 
 nent part of the growth to pass through ; in this case 
 some pigment may be found surrounding the base of 
 the small transparent growth. 
 
 Sarcoma of the choroid may be met with either pig- 
 mented or unpigmented, and may belong to any of 
 the varieties — round-celled, spindle-celled, or mixed. 
 When seen in an early stage of the disease, it may be 
 difficult to distinguish from a simple detachment of 
 the retina (p. 123). 
 
THE CHOROID 115 
 
 In the albino there is a congenital absence of pig- 
 ment both in the retinal epithelium and in the tissue 
 of the choroid, as well as in the iris. This condition 
 is shown in Plate I, fig. 2. 
 
116 TIIK OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 CHAPTER VIII 
 
 THE RETINA 
 
 When it is remembered that the retina in front of 
 the pigment layer is transparent^ it will be under- 
 stood that the appearances produced by disease of 
 this part may be much modified by the condition of 
 the choroid, &c. Affections of the retina may give 
 rise to — 
 
 1. A loss of transparency. 
 
 2. Swelling of the retinal tissues. 
 
 3. Inflammatory exudation into the retina. 
 
 4. Haemorrhages of various kinds. 
 
 5. Changes in pigmentation. 
 
 6. Differences in level of different parts, due to 
 
 detachment or new growth. 
 
 7. Changes in the retinal vessels. 
 
 (1) Loss of transparency is most commonly the 
 result of retinitis, and may vary from the slightest 
 haze which is found in the early stage of inflamma- 
 tion, and which can only be detected with difficulty 
 by the direct examination and by using a very sub- 
 dued light, to dense white patches which may conceal 
 everything behind them. 
 
RETINITIS 117 
 
 (2) Swelling of the retinal tissues is generally most 
 marked near the disc, being due partly to increased 
 fulness of the capillaries with hypertrophy of the 
 connective-tissue elements, together with swelling of 
 the nerve-fibres. The most obvious ophthalmoscopic 
 signs of this swelling of the retina are, that the 
 striations of the nerve-fibres are more distinct than 
 normal, while the vessels are more tortuous, the 
 tortuosity showing itself not only in a lateral but also 
 in an antero-posterior plane ; this is proved by the 
 change of colour where the vessel bends backwards, 
 and signifies great irregularity of the retinal surface. 
 
 (3) Inflammatory exudation into the retina may be 
 serous, fibrinous, or purulent in character. Retinitis 
 may affect the whole retina or be limited to one part. 
 The clinical varieties commonly met with are — 
 
 Albuminuric retinitis, 
 
 Diabetic retinitis, 
 
 Syphilitic retinitis, 
 
 Leucocythaemic retinitis, 
 
 Septic retinitis ; 
 but cases are sometimes seen in which the cause is 
 obscure, and these are called idiopathic. 
 
 Retinitis produces no external signs of its presence 
 beyond impaired vision. The ophthalmoscopic sym- 
 ptoms are haemorrhages, white patches, increased 
 fulness and tortuosity of the veins, with swelling of 
 the retinal tissue indicated by the antero-posterior 
 bends in the vessels. 
 
 The white patches are usually irregular in shape, 
 with softish-looking edges. They consist partly of 
 
118 THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 inflaminatory exudation in various stages of fatty 
 degeneration, together with thickening and degene- 
 ration of the nerve-fibres. These patches may lie in 
 front of and partly hide the retinal vessels ; when this 
 is the case we know that the anterior part of the 
 retina must be involved in the morbid process. 
 Sometimes the patches are behind the vessels, which 
 may then be slightly lifted up by them. 
 
 These white patches are most frequently seen about 
 the disc and the macula, or between them ; the most 
 characteristic appearance is that found in alh^imimiric 
 retinitis^ in which the white patches may occur in a 
 circular form, radiating from the macula like the 
 spokes of a wheel, the whole forming a circle much 
 larger than the disc, and having a white lustrous 
 appearance. In these cases numerous retinal haemor- 
 rhages are generally present, both eyes are usually 
 affected, and the condition is often accompanied with 
 papillitis. The kidney disease which most commonly 
 gives rise to this form of retinitis is that known by the 
 name of granular kidney, this disease being then in- 
 variably in an advanced stage ; although it must be 
 borne in mind that occasionally the retinitis precedes 
 the presence of albumen in the urine by some months. 
 Tumours of the brain sometimes produce exactly the 
 same ophthalmoscopic appearance as the retinitis due 
 to kidney disease. 
 
 Diabetic retinitis presents very much the same 
 ophthalmoscopic signs, though there are usually more 
 haemorrhages and the patches appear less white and 
 are more scattered, having little tendency to form the 
 
PLATE IV. 
 
 Fig. 1. — Retinitis pigmentosa. In this case a givat deal of pigment 
 has migrated into the superficial la^^ers of the retina. The vessels 
 are very fine, and the disc waxy-looking. 
 
 Fig. 2. — Tlu'ombosis of the central vein. Probably in this case the 
 main vein is only partially obstructed ; (me vein appears to carry no 
 blood; numerous haemorrhages are present, some of which are becom- 
 ing decolourised. 
 
 Fig. 3. — Atrophy of the optic disc The vessels are attenuated, 
 the disc is very white. There is a large sclerotic ring, which is 
 probably congenital. The choroidal vessels are to be seen with dark- 
 coloured interspaces. 
 
 Fig. 4. — Albuminuric retinitis. Numerous hsemorrhagfes, both 
 flame-shaped and punctate in character, are present; the white 
 patches of degeneration are very bright in the region of the macula. 
 The vessels are characteristic of the disease, the veins being full and 
 tortuous, the tortuosities being both lateral and antero-posterior. 
 Where the lower temporal artery crosses the vein it conceals it for a 
 short distance on both sides; this indicates thickening and opacity of 
 the arterial coats. 
 
P] ale IV. 
 
 Yuk.l 
 
 ■F16.2. 
 
 'li<6 
 
 ^i>5-4. 
 
 Bale <^ DanielssoH, Ltd. 
 
RETINAL HiTlMORRHAGES 119 
 
 stellate arrangement so characteristic of the albumi- 
 nuric variety. This form of retinitis may be com- 
 plicated with vitreous opacities. 
 
 Syi^hilitic retinitifi may occur with or without 
 choroiditis; when the retina is alone affected the 
 most marked ophthalmoscopic sign is a diffused haze 
 over the whole retina, which diminishes the bright red 
 fundus reflex. 
 
 Leucocythxmtc retinitis is characterised by the 
 great tortuosity and size of the retina vessels as well 
 as by the light yellow colour of the fundus reflex. 
 
 Sej^tic retinitis may occur in pyrcmia as a result of 
 septic emboli, the retinitis becoming purulent and 
 extending to the other tissues of the eye. 
 
 (4) Haemorrhages in the retina may take place either 
 from the large vessels or from the capillaries, and 
 are most frequently symptomatic of some general 
 disease. Retinal haemorrhages may be caused either 
 by increased pressure within the vessels, by degene- 
 ration of the coats of the vessels, by changes in the 
 blood itself, or by trauma ; they may be met with in 
 retinitis, papillitis, embolism of the central artery, 
 thrombosis of one of the veins, anaemia, pressure on 
 any part of the optic nerve between the disc and the 
 point where the vessels pierce the nerve-sheath, 
 cardiac disease, glaucoma, or any of the numerous 
 accidents to which the eye is liable. The shape and 
 extent of the ha)morrhages depend in great measure 
 upon the part of the retina in which they occur; the 
 most common variety is that taking place in the nerve- 
 fibre layer, when the haemorrhages are ^'flame-shaped, " 
 
120 THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 with well-marked lateral edges and feather}^ ends. 
 'J^hese hoomorrliages most com monl}^ take place from the 
 lariifcn' vessels and have a linear shape, radiating from 
 the disc ; they arc usually small and numerous, and 
 occur near and follow the course of the vessels, espe- 
 cially the veins, though it is rare to find any visible 
 rupture ; sometimes they partially cover up one of the 
 vessels. The next most frequent position for retinal 
 ha3morrhages is the inner nuclear layer. When taking 
 place into the deeper parts of the retina they may 
 occur as small spots or irregular-shaped circles, and 
 are usually capillary in character. If the bleeding 
 takes place from a large vessel and is profuse, some 
 may escape into the vitreous, or being effused back- 
 wards may separate the retina from its epithelial 
 layer, and so produce a detachment of the retina. 
 
 Retinitis with a large number of haemorrhages is 
 sometimes spoken of as hemorrhagic retinitifi. 
 
 Large haemorrhages are occasionally seen in the 
 macular region, and are called siih-hyaloid, because 
 they occur between the retina and the hyaloid mem- 
 brane. They are usually circular in shape, several 
 times as large as the disc, and are accompanied with 
 great loss of vision for the time being. When the 
 extravasated blood forms only a very thin layer over 
 the retina the patient may see everything of a red 
 colour. These haemorrhages, which are at first cir- 
 cular, soon become decolourised above, partly no 
 doubt by gravitation of the blood-corpuscles, and 
 partly also by absorption, so that when the case is 
 seen later it may have taken the form of a half-circle 
 
RETINAL HiEMORRHAGES 121 
 
 or crescent witli its convexity downwards, tlie upper 
 part of the circle being of a liglit colour and the lower 
 part dark red, separated by a well-defined line of de- 
 marcation. Vision in these cases is usually completely 
 restored. 
 
 Eecent retinal hasmorrhages are of a bright red 
 colour; they may retain this colour for a long time 
 and then become of a dirty reddish-brown tint, ulti- 
 mately turning black ; or the colouring matter may 
 be absorbed, leaving white or yellow patches, which 
 gradually undergo degeneration : ultimately they may 
 leave no trace behind, or there maybe irregular spots 
 left to mark their previous position. These spots 
 may be white or light coloured, showing more or less 
 of the structure of the choroid, with some pigment 
 about their margins. Sometimes the spots are very 
 small, consisting merely of pigment, which may be 
 either the remains of the colouring matter of the 
 blood, or pigment set free from the hexagonal epithe- 
 lial cells. It is not always possible to make a dia- 
 gnosis between inflammatory and haomorrhagic scars 
 in the retina and choroid. The only conditions which 
 might be mistaken for a haemorrhage of the retina are 
 — (i) The cherry-coloured spot which occurs at the 
 macula in cases of embolism of the central .artery, 
 (ii) The somewhat similar appearance produced in a 
 detached retina in the macular reo^ion, the retina beincr 
 detached all round but remaining adherent at the 
 macula itself; this is a very rare condition, (iii) 
 Minute new vessels which have formed in a retinal 
 exudation. All these may more or less simulate a 
 
122 THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 retinal hnsniorrhage, and it is necessary the student 
 should be on his guard. 
 
 (5) Changes in pigmentation may be duo to any in- 
 flammatory or atropliic cliange taking place in the 
 retinal epithelium. 
 
 Retinitis 111 gmentoaa (Plate IV, fig. 1) is the disease 
 in which these changes are most frequently seen. 
 It consists of hypertrophy with gradual shrinking 
 of the connective tissue contained in the different 
 layers of the retina, together with atrophy of the 
 nerve elements and the migration of the pigment 
 set free from the epithelial laj^er, which travels 
 forwards into the anterior part of the retina, and 
 there undergoes proliferation. This pigment shows 
 a great tendency to coalesce into spots with radiating 
 processes, very much resembling bone-corpuscles as 
 seen under the microscope. As the radiating pro- 
 cesses from one spot join with those of adjacent 
 spots, a fine network is produced, somewhat resem- 
 bling black lace. In some cases the pigment will 
 be found accumulating along the sheath of one 
 of the retinal vessels. These pigment changes are 
 usually most marked in the peripherj'-, often occupying' 
 a circle midway between the margin of the disc and 
 the equator. 
 
 No satisfactory explanation has been given of this 
 peculiar arrangement taken up by the pigment. While 
 these changes are going on, the walls of the vessels 
 are becoming thicker at the expense of their internal 
 capacity, and this diminution of the blood- stream is 
 frequently the first ophthalmoscopic sign of the dis- 
 
DETACHMENT OF THE EETINA 123 
 
 ease. The diameter of the vessels continues to decrease, 
 while the retina undergoes a gradual sclerosis until 
 ultimately the different layers become unrecognisable, 
 the rods and cones being quite destroyed. Early in 
 the disease the disc becomes pale, assuming gradually 
 a waxy opaque look ; both eyes are alwaj^s affected. 
 
 The chief symptoms which accompany this disease 
 are, great torpor of the retina, with decreasing vision, 
 concentric contraction of the visual fields, night-blind- 
 ness, &c. Frequently posterior polar cataract accom- 
 panies retinitis pigmentosa, and may be due to pig- 
 ment travelling forward from the retina along the 
 central lymph-channel to the back of the lens, where 
 it adheres and proliferates. 
 
 Retinitis pigmentosa may be congenital, or it ma}^ 
 occur in early life. Some varieties of specific choroido- 
 retinitis present much the same ophthalmoscopic 
 appearances. It is most important to distinguish 
 retinal from choroidal pigmentation. 
 
 (6) Differences in level of different parts of the retina. 
 — It is essential that the student should learn to 
 recognise these differences, since detachments of the 
 retina are very common. When such detachments are 
 large and have become opaque, they can hardly escape 
 detection; but when the portion of retina detached is 
 small and retains its transparency, the diagnosis is by 
 no means so easy. In making a systematic examina- 
 tion, a detachment may now and then be seen with 
 focal illumination, when the displaced portion of the 
 retina is very large and lies a long way forward. 
 Usually, however, this is not the case, and having 
 
124 THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 detected nothing with the focnl illumination, one 
 passes on to the concave mirror held at a distance 
 from tlie eye, tlie patient being directed to look first 
 up, then down, and finally straight in front of him; 
 thus one is enabled to make a thorough examination 
 of the vitreous. Should the reflex from one part of 
 the fundus appear much lighter than the rest we may 
 suspect a detachment, especially if the reflex of the 
 part alters while the eye is kept in one position, as it 
 may do when the retina changes its position so that 
 the light is reflected differently. Not only is there an 
 alteration in the reflex of the part, especially when 
 the detachment is opaque, but a portion of the details 
 may come into view, while nothing can be seen of the 
 rest of the fundus ; this is because the detached 
 portion is very hypermetropic, so that an upright 
 image of it will be seen. The detached portion may, 
 if opaque, appear in white undulating folds, on which 
 some of the vessels may be clearly seen ; on movement 
 of the eye it may be seen to float about. When, 
 however, the retina retains its transparency, the 
 ordinary fundus reflex from the choroid will be seen, 
 and the diagnosis will rest upon the position of the 
 vessels on the detached transparent retina. When a 
 retinal vessel on a transparent detachment thus conies 
 into view it has a characteristic appearance ; it shows 
 up very clearly, appears smaller than normal, undu- 
 lates when the eye is moved, and is more tortuous 
 than usual. Besides all this it has a much darker look 
 than normallj'-, while the central light reflex on it 
 will have disappeared. The darker appearance is due 
 
DETACHMENT OP THE RETINA 125 
 
 to the light reflected from the choroid being some- 
 what obstructed by the vessel, so that it is seen partly 
 by reflected and partly by transmitted light ; this 
 appearance is quite characteristic, and should at once 
 set one on the right track. Then, on putting up the 
 objective for the indirect method, the detached retina 
 or the vessels on it will appear different from the 
 rest of the fundus ; and on moving the lens slightly 
 from side to side while the image is kept in view, 
 the detached portion will look to slide over the 
 other part, and thus a " parallax '' will be produced 
 (p. 143). 
 
 The direct examination gives us much fuller infor- 
 mation ; when the detachment is thus looked at, the 
 vessels have a foreshortened and wavy appearance ; 
 the detachment and the vessels on it will also be 
 found to be very hypermetropic — that is, supposing 
 that the details of the disc are seen clearly with- 
 out a convex glass behind the ophthalmoscope, and 
 that the weakest convex glass blurs these details : 
 the detached portion of the retina, or if it be trans- 
 parent, then the vessels on it, may be seen with a 
 strong convex glass ; the more forward the retina, the 
 higher the glass through which it can be seen. If 
 the strongest glass be thus found out, we may esti- 
 mate the distance between the detachment and the 
 sclera; for 3 D. equals 1 mm., so that if the case in 
 question could be seen with a convex 12 D., while the 
 disc was emmetropic, then we should know that this 
 distance was 4 mm. Detachments are, however, most 
 frequently met with in myopes, so that a concave 
 
126 THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 glass would bo necessary to see tlie details of the 
 disc ; and yet perhaps the detachment may be clearly 
 seen with a convex glass ; the difference between the 
 weakest concave glass with which the disc can be 
 clearly seen, and the highest convex glass with which 
 the particular vessel can be seen, will give us the 
 measurement we require. 
 
 In many cases a part of the detachment is trans- 
 parent while a part has become opaque; sometimes 
 a rent can be detected, so that the fluid in front and 
 behind the detachment being in direct communication, 
 the retina can float about with every movement of 
 the eye. The edges of the torn retina will be found 
 turned in towards the vitreous. 
 
 When the detachment takes place in the macular 
 region, the retina usually remains adherent to the 
 macula itself, thus producing an ophthalmoscopic 
 appearance somewhat like the cherry-red spot of em- 
 bolism ; this red spot might also be mistaken for a 
 hemorrhage by an inexperienced observer. 
 
 The character of fluid behind the detachment can- 
 not often be diagnosed ; it is most frequently serum of 
 a light straw colour, but it may be blood : a more 
 important point, however, to arrive at is — is the de- 
 tachment due to fluid or is it due to a new growth ? 
 Other points not resting on the ophthalmoscope must 
 be called to our aid to enable an accurate opinion to 
 be formed. Thus the history of the case, the position 
 of the detachment, and the tension of the eyeball may 
 help us to arrive at a correct conclusion. In simple 
 detachment the tension is liable to be diminished. 
 
RETINAL VESSELS 127 
 
 while in that due to a growth the tension is usually 
 above the normal at some period of its growth. As a 
 rule the surface of a growth is more prominent; some- 
 times a haemorrhage being visible upon it. No move- 
 ment of the detachment will be detected on moving the 
 eye, and if the case be watched for some weeks it may 
 be noticed if any increase is taking place. Detach- 
 ments are most frequent in myopic eyes, but a new 
 growth may occur in any eye, whatever its refraction. 
 Detachments are frequently accompanied by vitreous 
 opacities, which may interfere more or less with the 
 ophthalmoscopic picture. Posterior cortical cataract 
 is another complication that may arise from detached 
 retina. 
 
 (7) Changes in the retinal vessels. 
 (a) They may be increased or diminished in size. 
 ■ (6) They may be unusually tortuous. 
 
 (c) Pulsation may be present in the veins or arteries. 
 
 (d) There may be alterations in the central light 
 streak on the vessels. 
 
 (e) The coats of the vessels may be thickened and 
 their transparency diminished. 
 
 (a) Changes in the size of the retinal vessels may 
 present numerous varieties, and are not always easily 
 detected on account of the great individual differ- 
 ences that are met with; but a careful comparison of 
 the vessels in the two eyes, together with the relative 
 size of the arteries and veins, may assist one in 
 arriving at a correct conclusion; the veins are as a 
 rule about one third larger than the arteries. 
 
 The comparison of the relative size of the veins 
 
128 THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 and arteries may be somewhat complicated if their 
 distribution does not correspond ; for instance, two 
 veins may accompany one artery, or vice versa. 
 
 Increase in the size of the arteries is not common, 
 and when it does occur is usually due to some affec- 
 tion of the coats of the artery which has impaired its 
 tone and contractility ; it is seldom seen as a result of 
 retinitis or papillitis, as might be expected, and the 
 most marked cases of increase in the size of the 
 arteries that have been met with have been in reti- 
 nitis due to leucocythaemia. 
 
 Decrease in the size of the arteries is much more 
 common than increase, and is often very marked in 
 optic atrophy or any disease causing atrophy of the 
 retina ; it is also a frequent result of the retrogressive 
 changes following papillitis and retinitis; other causes 
 are, increase in the iutra-ocular tension, embolism, 
 thrombosis, and anaemia. 
 
 Increase in the size of the veins is frequently met 
 with, and is usually due to inflammation of the retina 
 involving the walls of the vessel, or to some disease 
 producing general venous congestion, or to direct pres- 
 sure on the venous trunk as it leaves the eye ; the in- 
 crease in the size of the vein is generally accompanied 
 by an increase in its length, which shows itself by 
 greater tortuosity than normal; all the veins may be 
 thus affected or only one, or even only a part of one. 
 
 Decrease in the size of the veins is much less 
 common than increase, and may be due to atrophy 
 of the retina or optic disc, embolism, thrombosis, or 
 any degenerative process taking place in the vein 
 
RETINAL VESSRLS 129 
 
 itself. When the veins seem slightly enlarged, espe- 
 cially if the disc is redder than usual^ the case may 
 be one of hypersemia. 
 
 In ansemia the arteries are slightly diminished, and 
 the discs and general fundus pale, owing to the blood 
 being of a lighter colour than normal from a defi- 
 ciency in the number of red blood-corpuscles. 
 
 In albuminuric retinitis the coats of the arteries 
 are always thickened and their calibre diminished. 
 Occasionally small aneurisms are found on some of 
 the arteries. 
 
 In atrophy of the papilla or retina the vessels will 
 be found diminished in size, and when this atrophy is 
 the result of inflammation a white line may frequently 
 be traced a good way along some of the larger arte- 
 ries. This white line is due to sclerosis of the middle 
 coat of the artery, or to an increase of the connective- 
 tissue elements of the arterial sheath, which not being 
 transparent can be easily seen by the direct method. 
 In rare cases not only may the sides of the vessels be 
 visible, but the front part also, so that no blood-stream 
 can be detected, the vessels appearing as white-looking 
 cords. The same condition may occasionally be seen 
 in the choroidal vessels. When the retinal vessels 
 are very much diminished in size they may appear as 
 small threads, stretching but a short distance over 
 the fundus. 
 
 But the most obvious change produced in the size 
 of the vessels is that due to cmhoUsm of the central 
 artery ; and since this artery has no anastomoses, the 
 retinal circulation can never be thoroughly re-estab- 
 
 9. 
 
130 THE OPnTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 lislicd. The cause of embolism is usually a pluf^ of 
 lymph detached from oue of the cardiac valves, plug- 
 ging the main central artery ; there is sudden and 
 almost total loss of sight without pain or giddiness ; 
 and if the case be seen early the ophthalmoscopic 
 appearances are very characteristic. The embolus is 
 not generally visible, but there is great pallor of the 
 disc; the arteries are much diminished, the veins 
 slightly dilated, but decreasing in size towards the 
 disc ; sometimes the blood-stream is broken up into 
 segments, retinal haemorrhages are usually present, 
 and a white hazy, opaque appearance surrounds the 
 macula, the centre of which is occupied by a bright 
 red spot (cherry-coloured spot) . This opaque appear- 
 ance is due to oedema of the nerve-fibre layer. The 
 retina of the fovea centralis is very thin, and contains 
 but little connective tissue, so that no oedema takes 
 place here, therefore the red of the choroid shows 
 through ; this colour is much intensified by the white 
 appearance around, and possibly also by congestion 
 of the choroid; so that really the cherry-coloured 
 spot is produced chiefly as the result of contrast. 
 Should the embolus be too small to plug the central 
 artery, then it may block up one of the main branches, 
 and the ophthalmoscopic picture will vary accordingl3^ 
 Later, the disc becomes atrophic, the odoema subsides, 
 and therefore the red spot disappears, while the 
 arteries will always remain very small. A similar 
 condition may be produced by a haBmorrhage into the 
 optic nerve sheath. 
 
 Thrombosis of the central vein produces somewhat 
 
THE RETINA 131 
 
 analogous appearances, but the arteries are larger, the 
 veins mucli fuller, while retinal ha3niorrhages are more 
 numerous and larger. 
 
 {h) The vessels may he unusually tortuous, which is 
 expressed by their increased length ; these tortuosi- 
 ties when present are usually lateral. The condition 
 may be met with in cases where a nasvus of the 
 skin of the lids or brow exists, or it may be one of the 
 permanent remains of an attack of neuro-retinitis; it 
 is also occasionally found as a congenital condition, 
 and then usually in eyes that are highly hyperme- 
 tropic. The tortuosity of vessels on a portion of de- 
 tached retina has already been referred to, and may 
 then be in an antero-posterior plane, i. e. at right 
 angles to the surfaces of the retina, as well as lateral. 
 
 (c) Pulsation of the arteries and veins. — Arterial pul- 
 sation is almost always a pathological condition, and 
 is due either to increased tension or to heart disease; 
 it is most commonly seen in cases of glaucoma, and is 
 then an important diagnostic sign ; when due to heart 
 disease it is usually the result of aortic regurgitation, 
 the pulsation extending a considerable distance along 
 the artery, sometimes even to the smaller vessels, while 
 in glaucoma the pulsation is usually confined to the 
 disc. Arterial pulsation occurs in glaucoma either 
 spontaneously, or it may easily be produced by slight 
 pressure on the eye ; and since the tension of a glau- 
 comatous eye is liable to vary at different times, so 
 will the pulsation be more apparent sometimes than 
 at others ; it is not usually to be seen in all the 
 arteries at once, and is best seen on the disc. It con- 
 
132 THE OrHTnALMOSCOPE 
 
 Rists of a very sudden dilatation, which is synchronous 
 with the cardiac systole, and is followed by a gradual 
 emptying; the rapidity of arterial pulsation being in 
 great contrast to the steady pulsation taking place in 
 the veins. 
 
 No pulsation exists in the normal eye, partly because 
 the arteries here are so small that the pulse -wave has 
 become very feeble, and partly because the intra- 
 ocular tension exactly balances the tension on the in- 
 side of the vessels, and therefore the blood passes on 
 in an almost continuous stream. In glaucoma the 
 intra- ocular tension is greater than that in the vessels, 
 so that the blood is able to flow along the retinal 
 arteries only during the systole of the heart ; when the 
 pressure is lowered during the diastole, the arteries 
 are occluded by the intra-ocular pressure. 
 
 Venous pulsation is usually physiological, but it 
 may occur with an increase of the intra-ocular tension. 
 This pulsation can best be seen on the disc, sometimes 
 at the point where the main vein is formed by the 
 junction of the upper and lower retinal veins. It 
 consists of a gradual emptying and refilling of the 
 vessel, and is possibly due to the slight increase of 
 the intra-ocular tension which occurs with each con- 
 traction of the left ventricle; this increase being trans- 
 mitted through the vitreous to the veins, causing 
 them to empty. The veins, however, quickly refill as 
 the tension is lowered. 
 
 (d) Alterations in the light streak of the retinal 
 vessels. — It must be remembered that the retinal ves- 
 sels on section are oval, the perpendicular diameter 
 
THE RETINA 133 
 
 being less than the horizontal ; the fuller the vessels 
 the more they tend to the circular. This condition 
 influences considerably the breadth of the light reflex ; 
 the flatter the vessels, the broader the reflex. The 
 colour of the blood in the vessels also makes some 
 difference ; the lighter the colour, the better marked 
 is the central streak. 
 
 The light reflex is better marked and more regular 
 in the case of the arteries than the veins, and can be 
 traced further upon the former than upon the latter. 
 In oedema of the retina the reflex is much diminished, 
 while in detached retina it is usually absent. 
 
 (e) The walls of the vessels may he thicJcened and lose 
 their transparency, either from degeneration in one of 
 its various forms, or from inflammation. Inflamma- 
 tion of the vessel walls may produce a thickening of 
 the wall without any loss of transparency, causing a 
 diminution in the capacity of the vessel, or the 
 thickening may be of an opaque character, or the in- 
 flammation may affect the outer part of the vessel and 
 its sheath, causing a great increase in the connective- 
 tissue elements, with considerable increase in the 
 outside diameter of the vessel, while its carrying 
 capacity may be undiminished. The ophthalmoscopic 
 sign of this condition is a white line along the sides 
 of the vessels, which in extreme cases may appear 
 as white opaque cords. 
 
 This condition of thickening of the sheath and outer 
 part of the vessel is known as perivasculitis ; when 
 the condition exists only in the arteries it may be 
 spoken of as periarteritis. 
 
134 TIIK Ol'HTIIALMOSCOrE 
 
 Commotio retinae. — Sometimes after a severe contu- 
 sion of the eyeball some part of the retina may 
 assume a white clouded appearance, which may be 
 accompanied by impaired vision^ ciliary redness, and 
 photophobia. These symptoms usually pass off in 
 thirty-six hours. The condition is probably one of 
 oedema of the retina. 
 
 Retinitis proliferans is the name given to that con- 
 dition in which new vessels grow out into the vitreous 
 supported by connective tissue. Bands may be seen 
 stretching from one part of the fundus to another. 
 Some observers think that these cases commence as 
 large vitreous haemorrhages. 
 
 Glioma of the retina is a very malignant disease, 
 commencing usually in the neuroglia of one of the 
 granular layers of the retina. It is most common in 
 infants, but may occur up to the age of ten or twelve 
 years. Sometimes both eyes are affected. This con- 
 dition is best examined by focal illumination, when the 
 growth w^ill be seen of a pink-whitish colour, smooth or 
 lobulated, and frequently with blood-vessels on its 
 surface. 
 
 Glioma may be mistaken for inflammatory exuda- 
 tion in the vitreous, a condition sometimes called 
 jjseudo- glioma ; the distinguishing points are, that in 
 pseudo-glioma the colour is usually yellow or straw- 
 coloured, the surface is flat, posterior synechiae fre- 
 quently exist, while the iris itself is pushed forwards 
 in the centi'e and retracted in its ciliary portion ; the 
 tension is usually subnormal ; whereas in glioma the 
 whole of the iris is pushed forward, and the tension 
 
THK RETINA 135 
 
 may be increased duriug some part of its growth, 
 and is never subnormal so long as the coats of the eye 
 have not given way ; no posterior synechia) exist, and 
 the growth is of a pinkish colour and vascular. 
 
 Among ophthalmoscopic curiosities may be men- 
 tioned a very striking appearance ; the whole macular 
 region may be found dotted over with light-coloured 
 spots of various sizes, a condition which always exists 
 in both eyes, and has been described under the name 
 of guttate choroiditis, though it is probably not choroi- 
 ditis at all, but a physiological condition due to the 
 pigment in some of the hexagonal epithelial cells beiug 
 of a lighter colour than it is in the rest of the fundus, 
 and may be somewhat analogous to freckles on the 
 face ; but as no case has yet come within range of the 
 microscope, the exact situation and cause of these spots 
 is doubtful. 
 
 The vision in such cases is usually good; some having 
 been watched for years without uudergoiug any change. 
 
 Now and then a small row of spots may be seen, 
 somewhat like a row of small air-bubbles. These are 
 probably small transparent growths from the lamina 
 vitrea. 
 
 A few very bright refracting spots are occasionally 
 met with, usually near the vessels. Their pathology 
 is unknown. Cases in which they are present often 
 suffer from asthenopia. 
 
 Besides the conditions already mentioned, cysts of 
 the retina, rupture of the retina without a correspond- 
 ing rupture of the choroid, and congenital retinal 
 pigmentation may occasionally be met with. 
 
136 THE OrilTIIAI.MOSCOrE 
 
 CHAPTER IX 
 
 THE OrTIC NERVE 
 
 The only part of the optic nerve to be seen with 
 the ophthalmoscope is the disc. Changes taking- phice 
 in the nerve may or may not cause alterations in the 
 disc. It is necessary to remember that the optic nerve 
 passes through the rigid sclerotic opening, which is 
 somewhat funnel-shaped^ the narrowest part being in 
 front ; the nerve fits it closely, so that when any swell- 
 *ing takes place in this part, the sclerotic opening acts 
 as a ligature, and may cause serious changes in the 
 nerve-fibres as well as considerable obstruction to the 
 retinal circulation. These changes may be made 
 apparent by swelling, &c., of the optic disc. 
 
 The central artery and vein are for the nutrition of 
 the retina, and have nothing^ to do with the nutrition 
 of the disc itself. Since no anastomoses take place 
 between these vessels and those of the surrounding 
 structures the retinal circulation is terminal. 
 
 Abnormal conditions of the disc may cause — 
 
 1. Alterations in colour and transparency. 
 
 2. Alterations in surface level. 
 
 3. Changes in the margins of the disc. 
 
THE OPTIC NERVE 137 
 
 1. Alterations in colour. — Great variations are met 
 with in the colour of the discs in different subjects, 
 so that it is extremely difficult in many cases to 
 decide when any increase of the normal colour has 
 taken place; sometimes^ no doubt, the illumination 
 necessary for the examination may cause temporary 
 flushin*^ of the disc, hence too much reliance 
 must not be placed on this fact alone. A comparison 
 of the colour of the discs on the two sides may 
 help one to arrive at a correct conclusion. No doubt 
 hyYiercemia does frequently exist, and will cause 
 an increase in the normal pink colour, this increase 
 of colour being due to fulness of the capillaries. When 
 the hyperaemia is marked in character, it is usually 
 accompanied by some increase in size of the retinal 
 veins, with possibly some slight softening of the 
 margin of the disc ; this change will be best detected 
 by the direct examination. 
 
 Both eyes are usually affected. This condition of 
 hyperaGmia may remain for a long time and then 
 gradually subside, or it may pass on to inflammation, 
 and will be referred to later under the head of papil- 
 litis ; or it may pass on to the opposite condition, 
 atrophy of the optic disc. 
 
 Anxmia may cause the discs to look paler than 
 usual; whilst at the same time the retinal vessels may 
 be badly filled. In pernicious anaemia the red of the 
 choroid may be diminished, while the retinal veins 
 may bo almost as light-coloured as the arteries. As 
 age advances the disc becomes paler, so that a pale 
 disc, which, when seen in an old person, may be normal. 
 
138 TUE OrHTIIALMOSCOrE 
 
 might ill a young individual indicate a condition 
 bordering on atrophy. 
 
 Atrophy of the optic nerve may be divided into — 
 Primary. 
 Secondary. 
 Consecutive. 
 
 Primary atrophy is that condition which is not 
 preceded by any inflammatory action ; though it must 
 be remembered that since failing vision is almost the 
 only symptom of atrophy, the disease may have been 
 in progress for a long time before being detected, 
 and any inflammatory action which may have pre- 
 ceded the degenerative processes may have vanished, 
 leaving no indication behind. This form of atrophy 
 may exist as a purely local disease, but is most com- 
 monly met with in association with locomotor ataxy 
 and disseminated sclerosis. 
 
 Secondary atrophy is the term used by most authors 
 to signify an atrophy due to some injury or disease of 
 the nerve or retina ; common causes being pressure on 
 any part of the nerve, embolism of the central artery 
 of the retina, retinitis pigmentosa, choroido-retinitis, 
 syphilitic retinitis, &c. 
 
 Consecutive or post-neuritic atrophy is due to the 
 gradual destruction of the nerve-fibres of the optic 
 nerve following upon inflammation of the papilla. 
 
 In atroj)hy the disc is usually very white, or in some 
 cases grey, but the ophthalmoscopic appearances will 
 vary considerably with the stage of the disease and 
 its cause. The whiteness of the disc is due to degene- 
 ration of the nerve-fibres, together with the capillaries 
 
THE OPTIC NERVE 139 
 
 which supply them. If a case of primary atrophy is 
 seen when fairly advanced, with the indirect method 
 the disc will appear intensely white, with well-marked 
 margin ; the latter being rendered very distinct by 
 the shrinking of the nerve-fibres, which exposes 
 the sclerotic ring. With the direct method the white 
 may be less marked ; in fact, it may be of a bluish- 
 white colour or grey, the stippling produced by the 
 perforations of the lamina cribrosa being usually very 
 distinct. As the optic nerve shrinks no decrease takes 
 place in the size of the disc, but a depression of its 
 surface is gradually produced, forming what is known 
 as the atrophic cuf. This cup is always shallow, 
 while the vessels can be seen to slope gradually 
 down to the bottom of the disc. When the 
 atrophy is of a consecutive character, as in cases of 
 papillitis, the atrophy may be spoken of as post- 
 papillitic. The ophthalmoscopic signs indicating 
 this condition are, badly defined disc-margin, vessels 
 somewhat tortuous and diminished in size, with a 
 white line extending along some of them ; little or no 
 cupping is present, while some remains of organised 
 material may be seen about the disc, or covering some 
 of the vessels. With the direct method the disc has 
 often a strikingly opaque appearance. 
 
 Atrophy of the optic nerve may commence in any 
 part of its course between the optic chiasma and the 
 eye, extending in either direction from the point first 
 attacked. 
 
 Atrophy following retinitis pigmentosa produces a 
 waxy-looking disc, while the vessels are often very 
 
140 
 
 THE OrilTLJALMOSCOrE 
 
 sniiill. Very great cliffcrouces in sights however, will 
 be found in these cases ; some may have very white 
 discs and yet retain fair vision, while others have ex- 
 tremely bad vision and yet the discs may not be 
 very white. Sometimes the margins of the disc are a 
 safe guide as to the cause of the atrophy, while at 
 other times this is not the case. 
 
 2. Alterations in surface level.— Although the disc is 
 spoken of as the papilla, it is really but very slightly 
 raised above the general level of the fundus. The disc 
 may be depressed so as to form a cup, of which there 
 are three kinds: (1) the 'physiological cup; (2) the 
 
 Fig. 64. 
 
 ? ^!^»^5^gg%."a' !^Wi'^ -^'^ '' 
 
 Physiological cup. 
 
 atrophic cup; (3) the glaucoma cup. 
 also be raised as in papillitis. 
 
 The disc may 
 
THE OPTIC NERVE 
 
 141 
 
 The physiological nip is a congenital conrlition, and 
 was mentioned on p. 88. This cup is cone-shaped 
 and is formed by the separation of the nerve-fibres 
 which spread out to form the retina ; its chief and 
 important characteristic being that it does not involve 
 the whole disc. The cup is usually the whitest part 
 of the disc, because it contains few nerve-fibres, and 
 is therefore less vascular; it occupies more or less the 
 centre, and when deep allows the details of the lamina 
 cribrosa to be seen. 
 
 In Fig. G4 we have a deep physiological cup reach- 
 ing almost to the edge of the temporal side of the disc, 
 while on the nasal side it is excavated ; the stippling 
 of the lamina cribrosa is well seen. 
 
 Fig. 05. 
 
 Atrophic cup. 
 
142 
 
 THE OPHTfTALMOSCOPE 
 
 Tlie afropliic cnj) involves nearly the whole disc, bat 
 is shallow, and formed by a very gradual slope from 
 the disc margins. The vessels can be traced down the 
 cup without any interruption. This form of cup is 
 common in cases of primary atrophy. 
 
 The glaucoma cup is produced by an increase of the 
 intra-ocular pressure driving the nerve backwards, 
 and displacing the lamina cribrosa. The optic nerve 
 entrance is the weakest part of the coats of the e3^e- 
 ball, and is therefore the part which gives way first 
 
 Fig. G6. 
 
 Glaucoma cup. 
 
 to increased intra-ocular pressure. The essential 
 characteristics of this cup are^ that it involves the 
 whole disc, and is more or less excavated. When 
 these characteristics are well marked it is impossible 
 
THE OPTIC NERVE 
 
 143 
 
 to mistake them ; but in others, when the cup is only 
 forming, it is very easy to mistake it for one of the two 
 preceding varieties. Besides, in some cases the two 
 conditions may co-exist; thus a case of glaucoma 
 occurring in an eye with a well-marked physiological 
 cup may be some time before it develops the charac- 
 teristics belonging to the glaucoma cup. 
 
 With the indirect examination one will see, on 
 moving the objective slightly from side to side, a 
 well-marked iiarallaXj i. e. the margin of the disc will 
 
 Fig. 67. 
 
 appear to slide over the bottom of the cup. This is 
 due to the image of the margin of the disc making a 
 greater movement than the image of the bottom of 
 the cup. Thus, in Fig. 67, let a represent the edge 
 of a glaucoma cup, and h the lower part of the same ; 
 the image of a will be formed at A, and h at b. On 
 moving the lens c to d, b will move to b' and a to a' ; 
 therefore the image a, which represents the margin 
 
144 ruK ornTnALMOSCOPE 
 
 of the edge of the cup, will have made a greater 
 movement than b, which is the imago of the bottom 
 of the cup. With the direct method a parallax may 
 also be seen. We may estimate the depth of the cup 
 by tlie direct method, if we remember that 3 D = 1 
 mm. ; first find the glass through which the edge of 
 the disc is seen clearly, and then the glass through 
 which the bottom of the disc is seen well defined ; 
 for example, if the edge of the disc is seen clearly 
 with a +2 D., whilst the lowest part of the cup 
 requires —4 D., we should know that the cup was 
 2 mm. deep. 
 
 This deep excavated cup is found most marked in 
 cases of chronic glaucoma. 
 
 With the ophthalmoscope the vessels of the retina 
 will appear to stop at the edge of the disc as they 
 twist under the overhanging edge; they will be seen 
 again at the bottom of the disc, only more or less out 
 of focus. Another characteristic of the glaucoma 
 cup is, that the vessels are pushed towards the nasal 
 side; frequently also pulsation may be detected in 
 the arteries. This pulsation will be found referred to 
 on p. 131. 
 
 Neuritis. — Inflammation may attack any part of 
 the nerve between the optic chiasma and the eye, 
 and may, according to its location, be designated 
 as papillitis (choked disc) when the disc alone is 
 chiefly involved ; papillo -retinitis when the retina is 
 also implicated; neuritis when the nerve itself is 
 inflamed, and may then be either ascending or de- 
 scending ; retro-hulbar neuritis when the disease is 
 
THE OPTIC NERVE 
 
 145 
 
 behind tlie eye, affecting chiefly the central fibres of 
 the nerve. 
 
 A well-marked case of papillitis produces the 
 most characteristic ophtluilraoscopic appearances, 
 the disc being swollen and raised, somewhat like the 
 end of a champagne cork. In a simple case of 
 neuritis the appearances are less marked. Neuritis 
 
 Fig. 68. 
 
 Papillitis. 
 
 may exist alone or in conjunction with retinitis, and 
 may be caused by pressure on any part of the optic 
 nerve, by brain mischief, or by some general disease 
 such as albuminuria, diabetes, syphilis, rheumatism, 
 influenza, &c. 
 
 No distinct line of demarcation exists between 
 hyperjemia and inflammation of the disc; the one 
 
 10 
 
146 THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 passing imperceptibly into the other. When the 
 edge of tlic disc has become slightly indistinct, ac- 
 companied by distinct swelling, papillitis ma}^ be said 
 to have commenced. Papillitis may exist in varying 
 degrees; it is usually manifested by increased red- 
 ness, with swelling of the optic nerve, which fills up 
 the physiological cup, and gradually raises up the 
 centre of the disc, sometimes to an enormous extent. 
 The swollen disc overlaps its edges, so that the 
 margins are very ill-defined or quite lost, while the 
 colour of the disc may be increased, being much the 
 same as the surrounding choroid. The disc margins 
 have a striated or woolly appearance, due partly 
 to opacity and swelling of the nerve-fibres, and 
 partly to exudation of inflammatory material. The 
 arteries may be diminished in size, and at places 
 hidden from view by exudation ; the veins are dilated 
 and tortuous, the bendings taking place not only in 
 a lateral direction, but often in an antero-posterior 
 plane, especially when the swelling is very great. 
 A few hsemorrhages may be seen near the disc, 
 radiating from it in the direction of the nerve-fibres. 
 This condition may be well seen by the indirect 
 method, but the indistinctness of the disc margins 
 and the difference in level of the swollen disc can 
 best be appreciated by the direct method. The 
 amount of swelling may be estimated if we remember 
 that every +3 D. means an increase in level of 1 mm. 
 As the swelling diminishes shrinkage takes place, 
 and the condition is liable to pass on to atrophy. 
 lietro-hulbar neuritis is a form of infiammation 
 
THE OITIC NEUVE 147 
 
 affecting the orbital part of the optic nerve, in- 
 volving chiefly the central fibres, so that the oph- 
 thalmoscopic signs are but slight. Sometimes the 
 central part of the disc is congested and inflamed, 
 while the outer part seems to be passing into a con- 
 dition of atrophy ; the size of the large vessels is 
 but little affected, though the light streak on both 
 arteries and veins is usually diminished ; the retina 
 is more or less implicated, as shown by a slight 
 diminution in its transparency ; the vision is im- 
 paired, often by the presence of a scrotoma between 
 the macula and the disc, and even when this is not 
 present the central colour vision is usually affected. 
 
 Tobacco is the commonest cause, and in such cases 
 the prognosis is good. 
 
 3. Changes in the margin of the disc have already 
 been referred to under the diseases papillitis and post- 
 papillitic atrophy. In the first condition the margin 
 of the disc is often completely lost, as is shown in 
 Fig. 68 ; in slight cases, or in an early stage of the 
 inflammation, the edge of the disc can still be made 
 out, but it has a woolly striated appearance, more 
 marked at some parts than at others. In post-papil- 
 litic atrophy the margin of the disc is usually some- 
 what irregular, with disturbance and heaping up of 
 displaced pigment. 
 
 The most common cause of chano-e in the maro^iu 
 
 o o 
 
 of the disc is, however, that produced by myopia, a 
 crescent being formed on the outer edge. Myopia 
 is nearly always due to an increase in the antero- 
 posterior diameter of the eyeball. This increase 
 
148 THE OrHTIIALMOSCOPK 
 
 ill length is usually produced by a stretching of 
 the tissues at the back of the eye; the sclerotic 
 bulges at the point of least resistance, i. e. on the 
 outer side of the optic nerve, between it and the 
 macula, while the choroid, instead of stretching with 
 it, becomes dragged away from the disc margin, ex- 
 posing a crescent-shaped portion oE the sclerotic. 
 In slight cases a mere increase of the sclerotic ring 
 will become visible on the outer side of the disc; 
 wliile in liigli degrees of myopia the crescent may 
 attain an enormous size, completely surrounding the 
 disc and extending a long way towards the macula, 
 the broadest part of the myopic crescent being in- 
 variably outwards. This myopic crescent is occa- 
 sionally seen in cases of emmetropia and even in 
 bypermetropia ; here probably the eye was originally 
 hypermetropic, and is on the high road to myopia, 
 but the crescent becomes formed before it has arrived 
 at this condition. Sometimes it is not quite easy to 
 distinguish the line of demarcation between tbe disc 
 and tlie crescent ; frequently also some traces of pig- 
 ment are to be seen on the outer edge of the crescent. 
 Congenital crescent was first accurately described 
 by Fuchs under the name of coloboma of the nerve- 
 sheath. It is not a very uncommon defect, and 
 consists of a pale coloured crescent, with, the broad 
 part downwards ; in some cases there is difficulty in 
 making out the demarcation between the disc and 
 tbe crescent. The congenital crescent is probably a 
 part of the disc itself and not the exposed sclerotic, 
 as in the case of the myopic crescent. The disc is 
 
THE OPTIC NERVE 149 
 
 darker in colour than usual^ horizontally oval and 
 sometimes misshapen ; frequently the crescent is 
 staphylomatous; the eyes in which it is present have 
 usually more or less astigmatism, with a visual acute- 
 ness below the normal. 
 
 Opaque nerve-fibres is a congenital condition some- 
 times met with. As a rule, when the nerve-fibres 
 penetrate the lamina cribrosa they become divested 
 of their medulla, passing on as transparent fibres; 
 occasionally some of them retain their sheaths for a 
 time after passing into the eye, or, having lost them 
 at the optic nerve entrance, quickly regain them for 
 a short distance. The patches of opaque nerve-fibres 
 may be met with in various stapes and sizes ; perhaps 
 the commonest form met with being that in which a 
 tuft is present above and below the disc, extending 
 from near its margin upwards and downwards for some 
 distance on to the retina. Sometimes isolated patches 
 are seen a short way from the disc. They are always 
 white and opaque-looking*, somewhat flame-shaped 
 witli well-defined lateral margins and feathery ends, 
 shading off gradually into the normal retina. The 
 opacity occupies the anterior part of the retina, and 
 may even hide the retinal vessels more or less com- 
 pletely. When the patches are large, and extend a 
 long way over the retina, they bend out towards the 
 macula. Opaque nerve-fibres may exist in one or 
 both eyes, and when once seen are not likely to be 
 mistaken for a pathological condition ; their dense 
 white appearance, elongated shape, and feathery ends 
 are quite characteristic. It may be mentioned that 
 
150 THK OrHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 in tlie rabbit op.iqne nerve-fibres are the normal con- 
 dition ; hero they are arranged in two tufts, extend- 
 inir in a liorizontal direction on both sides of the 
 disc. Opaque nerve-fibres should be examined both 
 by the indirect and the direct methods. 
 
 Connective tissue on the disc. — Some part of the disc 
 or its vessels is occasionally more or less obscured by 
 a small shred, band, or irregular mass of connective 
 tissue ; sometimes resembling a very small piece of 
 cotton wool, just faintly blurring the vessels beneath 
 it, at others forming a very opaque white patch con- 
 cealing a good portion of the disc and vessels. The 
 condition is most probably a congenital one, being 
 the remnant of the fa3tal hyaloid artery; when not 
 congenital it maybe the organised remains of inflam- 
 matory exudation poured out in papillitis. 
 
APPENDIX 
 
 I WILL now conclude this small volume by shortly 
 recapitulating the plan of examination recommended ; 
 which if carried out iu the systematic manner sug- 
 gested, should render it very difficult for any serious 
 lesion to escape detection. 
 
 1. With the oblique illumination inspect the cornea, 
 lens, iris, and the anterior part of the vitreous. Notice 
 if any opacity or irregularity of the cornea is present, 
 and if its curvature appear normal. The aqueous 
 should be quite transparent, the iris moveable and 
 free from any adhesions which may exist, either be- 
 tween it and the cornea as a result of perforation, or 
 between the iris and lens as a result of iritis. The 
 lens should be perfectly transparent; sometimes it will 
 be found dislocated, either congenitally or resulting 
 from an accident. Pigment may be noticed on the 
 anterior capsule; this has been torn from the pos- 
 terior surface of the iris, and is evidence of previous 
 inflammation of this tissue. Opacities may be de- 
 tected in any part of the lens ; when at the posterior 
 pole the opacity appears to be further back than 
 might be expected. The anterior part of the vitreous 
 may contain blood, which may thus be detected; 
 or a growth, or a very prominent detached retina 
 may come into view. This examination may be sup- 
 plemented by a strong magnifying glass, or the 
 
152 APPENDIX 
 
 cornea may be fnrtlicr examined Avitli a +20 D. 
 behind the ophthalmoscope, the observer approach- 
 ing close to the patient. 
 
 2. Next take up the large concave mirror, and 
 reflect the light into the eye from a distance. Opaci- 
 ties of the cornea and lens will then appear as black 
 spots on a red ground. The cornea and lens being 
 transparent, notice if any vitreous opacities are 
 visible ; these are usually floating, and can best be 
 set in motion by directing the patient to look quickly 
 up, then down, and finally straight in front of him. 
 Should any vitreous opacities be detected, they may 
 be further examined with a plane mirror and a +8 D. 
 behind the ophthalmoscope. Nothing being detected 
 in the vitreous, notice if the disc or any part of the 
 fundus come into view. Should a vessel be seen, 
 note if it appear to move with the observer's head, 
 in which case it will be hypermetropic ; if against 
 it, then myopic. Should a detachment of the retina 
 exist, then, of course, this part will be very hyper- 
 metropic, and will answer the tests for that condi- 
 tion. Should the detachment be transparent, then a 
 vessel may be seen on the detached portion of retina ; 
 the vessel will appear darker than usual, more tortuous, 
 have a foreshortened appearance, and move with the 
 undulations of the detached retina. 
 
 3. Nothing being detected by the mirror alone, the 
 large biconvex lens should be held up in front of the 
 eye we are examining, while the light is still reflected 
 by the large concave mirror : thus one obtains an in- 
 verted image of the fundus. Notice first the shape, size, 
 
APPENDIX 153 
 
 and edges of the disc, whether well defined or blurred, 
 whether cupped or otherwise. Distinguish the arteries 
 from the veins, and note if they be full, tortuous, or 
 pulsation is present, whether clearly defined, or covered 
 up in parts, and whether a line can be traced along the 
 edge of any of the arteries ; then examine the periphery 
 by directing the patient first to look up, then down, 
 and finally to either side. Attention must next be 
 directed to the macular region. 
 
 4. Examine the eye by the direct method, first the 
 disc, then the periphery, and finally the macular re- 
 gion; compare the result by this plan and the indi- 
 rect method. Estimate the refraction at the disc. 
 When any patches of pigment, exudation, oi* hasmor- 
 rhages are found, we must decide whether they are 
 retinal or choroidal. 
 
 5. Finally notice the refraction of the patient by 
 retinoscopy. When the observer has time, a sketch 
 may be made of the disc. Nothing improves our 
 poAvers of observation so much, or leads to such 
 accuracy, as making a drawing of what is really 
 seen ; every detail must then necessarily receive con- 
 siderable attention. 
 
 A TABLE OF THE ENLARGEMENT OF THE 
 OPHTHALMOSCOPIC IMAGE. 
 
 Inverted image Upright Proportion, 
 
 with + 13 D. image. 
 
 Emmetropiii ... ... ... 5*2 ... 20 ... 1 to 4 
 
 Hypermetropia(uxial)of 12D. 7 ... 18-4 ... 1 to 26 
 
 Myopia (axial) of 12 D. ... 4-3 ... 30 ... 1 to 7 
 
y of the Ahmerfa 
 uouiib ooaiation 
 of upU.metrists 
 
 INDEX 
 
 Albino, 22, 82 
 
 Albuminuric retinitis, 117 
 
 Anaemia of discs, 137 
 
 Angle of deviation, 9 
 principal, 9 
 
 Anterior chamber, 94 
 
 Appearances of normal fundus, 81 
 
 Appendix, 151 
 
 Aqueous chamber, 94 
 
 Artery, central, 89 
 
 embolism of, 129 
 
 Artificial eye, Frost's, 34 
 
 Atrophic cup, 141 
 
 Atrophy of discs, 138 
 of retina, 122 
 of the choroid, 112 
 
 Axes, secondary, 12 
 
 Axis, principal, 9 
 
 B 
 
 Biconcave lens, 11 
 Biconvex lenses, 11 
 
 Cataract, 9G 
 
 Central artery and vein, 89 
 
 Chamber, anterior, 94 
 Cherry-coloured spot, 130 
 Cholesterine, 101 
 Choroid, 105 
 
 colloid disease of, 114 
 
 colobonia of, 113 
 
 rupture of, 113 
 
 sarcoma of, 114 
 
 tubei'cle of, 113 
 Choroidal hajmorrhage, 112 
 
 ring, 88 
 Choroiditis, 106 
 
 central, 110 
 
 disseminated, 109 
 
 guttate, 135 
 
 myopic, 110 
 
 plastic, 106 
 
 purulent, 103 
 
 senile. 111 
 
 suppurative, 108 
 Choroido-retinitis, 106 
 Cilio-retinal vessel, 91 
 Colloid disease of choroid, 114 
 Coloboma of choroid, 114 
 Commotio retinae, 134 
 Concave lens, 11 
 
 mirror, 26 
 
 at a distance, 38 
 
156 
 
 INDEX 
 
 Conc;eiiital crescent, 148 
 Conical cornea, 93 
 Connective tissue on disc, 150 
 Consecutive optic atrophy, 138 
 Convex lens, 11 
 Cornea, 92 
 Corneal opacities, 02 
 Couper's ophthalmoscope, 28 
 Crescent, congenital, 148 
 Crescent, myopic, 112, 147 
 Cribrosa, lamina, 88, 141 
 Cup, atrophic, 141 
 
 glaucoma, 142 
 physiological, 87, 141 
 
 Detachment of retina, 123 
 Deviation, angle of, 9 
 Diabetic retinitis, 117 
 Direct examination, 53 
 
 positions for, 54 
 Disc, optic, 86 
 
 hyperemia of, 137 
 
 image of, 41 
 
 inflammation of, 144 
 
 size of, 86 
 Disseminated choroiditis, 109 
 
 Embolism of central artery, 129 
 Emergent ray, 7 
 
 Estimation of refraction by reti- 
 noscopy, 68 
 by the direct, 62 
 Examination, methods of, 32 
 direct, 53 
 
 Examination, focal illumination, 36 
 indirect, 41 
 
 Floating opacities, 40, 100 
 Focal illumination, 36 
 Focus, anterior, 10 
 
 conjugate, 4, 10 
 
 negative, 10, 15 
 
 principal, 6 
 
 virtual, 5 
 Formation of images, 17 
 Fovea centralis, 85 
 Frost's artificiiil eye, 3i 
 Fuchs, 148 
 
 Galizowslii's ophthalmoscope, 31 
 Glass, index of refraction of, 7 
 
 magnifying, 31 
 Glaucoma cup, 142 
 Glioma of the retina, 134 
 Guttate choroiditis, 135 
 
 H 
 
 Hffiraorrhage, choroidal, 112 
 
 into nei've-sheath, 130 
 
 into vitreous, 100 
 
 macular, 120 
 
 retinal, 119 
 
 subhyaloid, 120 
 Helmholtz, 23 
 Hyaloid artery, 119 
 Hyperemia of choroid, 105 
 
 of disc, 137 
 
 of retina, 129 
 
INDEX 
 
 157 
 
 I 
 
 Illumination, focal, 36 
 linages, formation of, 17 
 
 real, 20 
 
 virtual, 18 
 Incident ray, 7 
 Index of refraction, 7 
 
 of cornea, 7 
 
 of glass, 7 
 Indirect examination, 41 
 Inflammation of tlie choroid, 106 
 
 disc, 144 
 
 retina, 117 
 Inverted image, 18 
 Iris, 94 
 
 K 
 
 Keratitis, 93 
 
 punctata, 93 
 
 Lamellar cataract, 96 
 Lamina cribrosa, 88, 141 
 
 vitrea, 114 
 Lens, 95 
 Lenses, 11 
 
 biconcave, 11 
 
 biconvex, 11 
 
 converging, 11 
 
 diverging, 11 
 LeucocytliKmic retinitis, 117 
 Lutea, macula, 85 
 
 M 
 
 Macula lutea, 85 
 Macular Lamorrhage, 120 
 
 Magnification by the direct method, 
 57 
 
 by the indirect method, 51 
 Magnifying glass, 31 
 Methods of examination, 32 
 Mirror, concave, 26 
 
 for retinoscopy, 31, 68 
 
 plane, 26 
 
 tilted, 26 
 Morton's ophthalmoscope, 28 
 Myopia, 112 
 Myopic choroiditis, 110 
 
 crescent, 112 
 
 N 
 
 Nerve, optic, 86, 136 
 Nerve- fibres, opaque, 149 
 Neuritis (see Papillitis), 144 
 
 retro-bulbar, 146 
 New vessels in vitreous, 104 
 Normal fundus, appearances of, 81 
 varieties of, 83 
 
 Objective lens, 31 
 
 Oblique illumination, 36 
 
 Opacities, corneal, 92 
 floating, 40, 100 
 vitreous, 100 
 
 Opaque nerve-fibres, 149 
 
 Ophthalmoscope, 21 
 
 demonstrating, 31 
 Galizowski's, 31 
 Morton's, 28 
 
 Optic disc, 86 
 
 nerve, 86, 136 
 
 Optics, 1 
 
158 
 
 INDEX 
 
 Tiipillitis, 1 14 
 Parallax, 143 
 
 Physiological cup, 87, 111 
 PigiiR'ntation, cliangcs in, 122 
 Pignieiitosa, rctiuitis, 122 
 Plane mirror, 26 
 Positions for direct, 53 
 for indirect, 42 
 Primary atrophy, 138 
 Principal angle, 8 
 axis, 9 
 
 focal distance, 9 
 focus, 9 
 Prisms, 8 
 Pulsation, arterial, 131 
 
 venous, 132 
 Punctata keratitis, 93 
 Purulent choroiditis, 108 
 
 R 
 
 Rays, 1 
 
 Real image, 20 
 
 Reflection, 2 
 
 by a concave surface, 3 
 
 by a convex surface, 6 
 
 by a plane surface, 2 
 Refraction, 6 
 
 by a plane surface, 6 
 
 by a prism, 8 
 
 by a spherical surface, 9 
 
 by lenses, 11 
 
 estimation of, G2 
 
 index of, 7 
 Retina, 82, 116 
 
 detachment of, 123 
 
 glioma of, 134 
 
 Retinal haemorrhages, 119 
 vessels, 127 
 
 Retinitis, 117 
 
 albuminurica, 117 
 diabetic, 117 
 leucocythajmic, 117 
 pigmentosa, 122 
 proliferans, 134 
 septic, 117 
 syphilitic, 117 
 
 Retinoscopy, 68 
 
 Ring, choroidal, 88 
 sclerotic, 88 
 
 Rupture of choroid, 113 
 
 Sarcoma of choroid, 114 
 Sclerotic ring, 88 
 Secondary axes, 12 
 
 optic atrophy, 138 
 Senile choroiditis, 111 
 Septic retinitis, 119 
 Shadows in retinoscopy, 68 
 Sparkling synchysis, 101 
 Subhyaloid hajmorrhage, 120 
 Suppurative choroiditis, 108 
 
 Thrombosis of central vein, 131 
 Tilted mirror, 2Q 
 Tubercle of choroid, 113 
 Tyrosin, 101 
 
 Variations in the size of image, 46 
 Varieties of the normal fundus, 82 
 
INDEX 
 
 159 
 
 Vein, central, 89 
 
 thrombosis of, 131 
 Vessels, central, 89 
 
 cilio-retiual, 91 
 
 retinal, 127 
 Virtual focus, 5 
 
 image, 18 
 
 Vitrea lamina, 114 
 
 Vitreous, 99 
 
 air- bubbles in, 103 
 liajmonhage into, 100 
 new vessels in, 104 
 opacities, 100 
 
 PRIMKU nv ADr.ARI) AND SON, 
 UAKTllOLOMEW CLOSK, E.C., AND 20, HANOVKK SQUARE, VT. 
 
No. 2. 
 
 London, 7, Great Marlboroujh Strfiof, 
 
 Jainian/, 189'.t. 
 
 A SELECTION 
 
 J. & A. CHURCHILL'S CATALOGUE, 
 
 COMPRISING 
 
 MOST OF THE KECENT WOKKS PUBLISHED BY THEM. 
 
 N.B.—J. tfc A. Churchill's larger Catalogue, which contains over 600 works 
 icith a Complete Index to their Subjects, will be sent on application. 
 
 Human Anatomy : a Treatise by various 
 
 Authors. Edited by Hknry Mdrkis, M.A., M.B. Lond., F.U.C.S., 
 Surgeon to, and Lecturer on Surgery at, the Middlesex HospitaL 
 Second Edition. Roy. 8vo, with 790 Illustrations, nearly all original, 
 and many of them in several colours, 3t3s. 
 
 Heath's Practical Anatomy : a Manual of 
 
 Dissections. Eighth Edition. Edited by William ANDhKSeN 
 F.K.C.S., Surgeon and Lecturer on Anatomy at St. Thomas's Hospital ; 
 Examiner in Anatomy for K.C.P. and S. Crown 8vo, with 329 En- 
 gravings. 153. 
 
 Wilson's Anatomist's Vade-Mecum. Eleventh 
 
 Edition, l)y Hknry E. Clark, M.IJ.C.S. Eng., F.F.P.S. Glasg.. 
 Examiner in Anatomy F.P.S., and Professor of Surgery in St. 
 Mungo's College, Glasgow. Crown 8vo, with 492 Engravings and 26 
 Coloured Plates, 18s. 
 
 An Atlas of Human Anatomy. By Rickman 
 
 J. GOULKK, M.S., F.K.C.S., Surgeon and late Demonstrator of 
 Anatomy, University College Hospital. With 48 Imp. 4to Plates 
 (112 figures), and a volume of Ex{)lanatory Text. 8vo, £4 14s. ^5(^ 
 
 Human Osteology. By Luther Holden, Con- 
 suiting Surgeon to St. Bai tholomew's Hospital. Eighth Edition, 
 eililetriiy Chaklks Stkwart, F.R.S., Conservator of the Museum 
 li.C.S., and RoHKUT W. Kiai), M.D., F.R.C.S., Regius Professor of 
 Anatomy in the University of Aberdeen. 8vo, with 59 Lithographic 
 Plates and 71 Engravings, 16s. 
 
 By the same Author. 
 
 Landmarks, Medical and Surgical. Fourth 
 
 Edition. 8vo, '.Is. CA. 
 
 7, GREAT MARLBOROUGH STREET. 
 
J. 8f A. Churchiirs Recent Works. 
 
 The Student's Guide to Surgical Anatomy. 
 
 ByKiiwutn Bkm.amy, F.K.C.S.,;in'l Mfinbfrof t)ie Bi^anl of Kxami- 
 iifis. Tliiiii Kililion. F<^ip. '^vo, w itli Ml Kn^Maviii<,'s, 7s.6<l. 
 
 Anatomy of the Joints of Man. By Henry 
 
 MoKiils, St nior Sur;i«-oM (<» the Mi<Mlt'Sfx Hospital. With It 
 Lil.hojirapliic I'lati-s (several (ioloiircd). 8vi», H5s. 
 
 Diagrams of the Nerves of the Human Body, 
 
 ♦•xliil.itiii^ tlit'ir ()ii<fin, Divisions, and Connections, with tlieir I)is- 
 triliution to the Various KeKions of the Cutaneous Surface, and to 
 all the Muscles. By Sir W. H. Flowkk, K.C.B., F.K.S., F.K.C.S. 
 Third Edition, with 6 Plates. Royal 4to, 12s. 
 
 A Manual of General Pathology, for Students 
 
 and Practitioners. By W. S. Laz.vrus-Barlow, B.A., M.D., late 
 Demonstrator of Pathology in the University of Cambridge. 8vo, 
 21s. 
 
 Pathological Anatomy of Diseases. Arranged 
 
 according to the nomenclature of the R.C.P. Lond. B\' Norman 
 Moore, M.D., F.R.C.P., Assistant Physician and Lecturer on Patho- 
 logical Anat:omy to St. Bartholomew's Hospital. Fcap. 8vo, with 
 111 Engravings, 8s. 6d. 
 
 A Manual of Clinical and Practical Pathology. 
 
 By W. E. Wynter, M.D., M.U.C.P., Assistant Physician to the 
 Middlesex Hospital, and F. J. Wetherkd, M.D., F.R.C.P., Assistant 
 Physician to the Consumption Hospital, Brompton. With 4 Coloured 
 Plates and 67 Engravings. 8vo, 12s. 6d. 
 
 General Pathology (an Introduction to). By 
 
 JoHy Bland Suttox, F.R.C.S., Assistant Surgeon to, and Lecturer on 
 Anatomy at, Middlesex Hospital. 8vo, with 149 Engravings, 148. 
 
 Atlas of the Central Nervous System. From 
 
 the larger work of Hirschfeld and Leveille. Edited by Howard H. 
 Tooth, M.D., F.R.C.P., Assistant Physician to the National Hos- 
 pital for the Paralysed and Epileptic. With 37 PLates carefully 
 coloured by Hand. Large Imp. 8vo, 408. 
 
 The Human Brain : Histological and Coarse 
 
 Methods of Research. By W. Bevan Lewis, L.R.C.P. Lond., Medical 
 Superintendent, West Riding Lunatic Asylum. 8vo, with Wood En- 
 gravings and Photographs, 8s. 
 
 The Physiology and the Pathology of the 
 
 Cerebral Circulation : an Experimental Research. By Leonard 
 Hill, M.D., Huuterian Professor, R.C.S. With 41 Hlustrations. 
 Koyal Bvo, 12s. 
 
 7, GREAT MARLBOROUGH STREET. 
 
J, 4r A, ChurcMlVa Recent Works, 
 
 A Contribution to the History of the Respira- 
 tion of Man : boiiif( the Croonian Lfcturcs rtelivfr('<l hofore tlie lioyal 
 Colle<{e of Physicians in ISii.'i, witJi siippleiuentaiy considerations of 
 t.h(r methods of inciuiiyand analytical results, liy VViu.iam Maiu'kt, 
 M.D., F.U.C.P., F.K.S. With Diaf^raMia. Imp. «Vo, :.s. (5d. 
 
 Elements of Human Physiology. By Ernest 
 
 11. Starling, M.D., F.K.C.P., Joint Lecturer on Physioloj^y 
 at Guy's Hospital. Third Edition. Crown .hvo, with lln Illustra- 
 tions, 7s. M. 
 
 Manual of Physiology: for the Use of Junior 
 
 Students of Medicine. Hy Gkrald F. Yko, M.I)., F.H.S., Emeritus 
 Professor of Phj^siolo^fy in King's College, London. Thiril Edition. 
 Crown 8vo, with 2h\ Engravings (manj' figures), and Coloured Plate of 
 Spectra, 14s. 
 
 Principles of Human Physiology. By W. B. 
 
 Carpkntkr, C.B., M.D., F.R.S. Ninth Edition, by Hknry Power, 
 M.B,, F.R.C.S. 8vo, with :i Steel Plates and 377 VVood Engravings, 
 .^Is. 6d. 
 
 Practical Lessons in Elementary Biology, for 
 
 Junior Students. By Pkvton T. B. Bkale, F.K.C.S., Lecturer on 
 Elementary Biology and Demonstrator in Physiology in King's 
 College, London. Crow u Svo, 3s. Gd. 
 
 Medical Jurisprudence : its Principles and 
 
 Practice. By Alfred S. Taylor, M.D., F.R.C.P., F.K.S. Fouitli 
 Edition, by Thomas Stevenson, M.D., F.R.C.P., Lecturer on Medical 
 Jurisprudence at Guj's Hospital. 2 vols. Svo, with 189 Engravings, 
 31s. 6d. 
 
 By the same Authors. 
 
 A Manual of Medical Jurisprudence. Twelfth 
 
 Edition. Crown Svo, with .55 Engravings, 14s. 
 
 The Theory and Practice of Hygiene. By J. 
 
 Lane Notter, M.D., Examiner in Hygiene and Public Health in the 
 University of Cambridge and in the Victoria University, Professor 
 of Hygiene in the Army Medical School ; and R. H. Firth, F.R.C.S., 
 Assistant Professor of "Hygiene in the Army Medicjil School. With 
 numerous Illustrations, lioyal Svo, 218. 
 
 A Manual of Practical Hygiene. By the late 
 
 E. A. Parkes, M.D., F.R.S. Eighth Edition, by J. Lane Notter, 
 A.M., M.D., F.R.S., Professor of Military Hygiene in the Army 
 Medical School. 8yo, with 10 Plates and 103 Engravings, ISs. 
 
 A Handbook of Hygiene and Sanitary Science. 
 
 By Qro. Wilson, M.A.. M.D., LL.D., D.P.H. Camb. Medical 
 Officer of Health for Mid-Warwickshire. Eighth Edition. Post 
 Svo, with Engravings, 123. 6il. 
 
 7, GREAT MARLBOROUGH STREET. 
 
J. 8f A. ChurchilVs Recent Works. 
 
 Hygiene and Public Health : a Treatise by 
 
 various Aiithors. Kditcd by Thomas Stkvkn.son, M.I)., F.R.C.P., 
 Lecturer on Chemistry and Meilical JurispnuU-nep at Guy's Hospital ; 
 Offieial Analyst to the Home Oftiee ; and Shiri.ky F. Murphy, Medical 
 Oflicer of Health of the County of London. In .J vols., roj'al 8vo, fully 
 Illustrated. Vol. I., 288. ; Vol. II.. .32s. ; Vol. III., 20s. 
 
 A Simple Method of V/ater Analysis, especially 
 
 desif^ncd for tiie use of Medical Ofticers of Ileal! li. By John C. 
 Thkksh, M.I). Vic, D.Sc. Lond., D.P.H. Camb., Medical Officer of 
 Health for the County of Essex. Second Edition, enlarged. Fcap. 
 8vo, 2s. 6d. 
 
 Elements of Health : an Introduction to the 
 
 Study of Hj-giene. By Louis C. Parkes, M.D., D.P.H. Lond., 
 Medical Officer of Health for Chelsea, Lecturer on Public Health at 
 St. George's Hospital. Post Svo, with 27 Engravings, 3s. 6d. 
 
 Diet and Food considered in relation to 
 
 Strength and Power of Endurance, Training and Athletics. By 
 Alexander Haig, M.D., F.R.C.P. Crown Svo, 2s. 
 
 The Prevention of Epidemics and the Con- 
 struction and Management of Isolation Hospitals. By Roger 
 McNeill, M.D. Edin., D.P.H. Camb., Medical Officer of Health for 
 the County of Argyll. Svo, with several Hospital Plans, 10s. 6d. 
 
 A Manual of Bacteriology, Clinical and Ap- 
 plied. With an Appendix on Bacterial Remedies, &c. By Richard 
 T. Hewlett, M.D., M.R.C.P., D.P.H. Lond., Assistiint in the 
 Bacteriological Department, Jenner Institute of Preventive Medicine. 
 With 75 Illustrations, post 8vo, 10s. 6d. 
 
 Hospitals and Asylums of the ^Vorld : their 
 
 Origin, History, Construction, Administration, Management, and 
 Legislation. By Sir Henry C. Burdett, K.C.B. Iu ^ vols., super- 
 royal 8vo, and Portfolio. Complete, 168s. Vols. I. and II. — Asylums, 
 90s. Vols. III. and IV.— Hospitals, with Plans and Portfolio, 120s. 
 
 Mental Diseases : Clinical Lectures. By T. S. 
 
 Clouston, M.I)., F.R.C.P. Edin., Lecturer on Mental Diseases in the 
 University of Edinburgh. Fifth Edition. Cr. Svo, with 10 Plates, 14s. 
 
 The Insane and the Law : a Plain Guide for 
 
 Medical Men, Solicitors, and Others as to the Detention and Treat- 
 ment, Maintenance, Responsibility, and Capacity either to give 
 evidence or make a will of Persons Mentally Afflicted. With Hints to 
 Medical Witnesses and to Cross-Examining Counsel. By G. Pitt- 
 Lewis, Q.C., R. Percy Smith, M.D. . F.R.C.P., Resident Physician, 
 Bethlem Hospital, and J. A. Hawke, B.A., Barrister-at-Law. Svo, 14s. 
 
 7, GREAT MARLBOROUGH STREET, 
 
J. 8f A. ChurchilPs Recent Works, 
 
 A Text-Book on Mental Diseases for Students 
 
 and Practitioners of Medicine, liy TilEOnOBK H. Kem.ogg, M.D., 
 late Medical Superintendent of Willard State Hospital, U.S.A. With 
 Illustrations, 8vo, 253. 
 
 A Dictionary of Psychological Medicine, giving 
 
 the Definition, Etymology, and Synonyms of the Terms used in 
 Medical Psychology ; with the Symptoms, Trejitment, and Patho- 
 logy of Insanity ; and The Law of Lunacy in Great Britain and 
 Ireland. Edited by D. Hack Tuke, M.D., LL.D., assisted hy 
 nearly 130 Contributors, British, Continental and American. 2 vols., 
 1,500 pages, royal 8vo, Illustrated, 423. 
 
 Mental Physiology, especially in its Relation 
 
 to Mental Disorders. ByTHEO. B. Hyslop, M.D., Ilesi<lent Physician 
 and Medical Superintendent at Bethlem Hojal Hospital, Lecturer on 
 Mental Diseases in St. Mary's Hospital Medical School. 8vo, 18s. 
 
 The Mental Affections of Children : Idiocy, 
 
 Imbecility, and Insanity. By Wm. VV. Ireland, M.D. Edin., 
 formerly Medical Superintendent of the Scottish Institution for the 
 Education of Imtecile Children. With 20 Plates, 8vo, 14s. 
 
 Mental Affections of Childhood and Youth 
 
 (Lettsomian Lectures for 1887, et<^.). By J. Langdon-Down, M.D., 
 F.K.C.P., Consulting Physician tc the London Hospitiil. 8vo, 6s. 
 
 The Journal of Mental Science. Published 
 
 Quarterly, by Authority of the Medico-Psychological Association. 
 8vo, .^8. 
 
 Manual of Midwifery, including all that is 
 
 likely to be required by Students and Practitioners. By Alfred L. 
 Galabin, M.A., M.D., F.R.C.P., Obstetric Phj-sician and Lecturer 
 on Midwifery and Diseases of Women to Guy's Hospital. Fourth 
 Edition. Crown 8vo, with 271 Engravings, 1.5s. 
 
 The Practice of Midwifery : a Guide for Prac- 
 titioners and Students. By D. Lloyd Hocerts, M.D., F.R.C.P., 
 Lecturer on Clinical Midwifery and Diseases of Women at the Owens 
 College ; Consulting Obstetric Phj'sician to the Manchester Iloyal 
 Infirmary. Fourth Edition. Fcap. Svo, with Coloured Plates and 
 Wood (226) Engravings, 10s. 6d. 
 
 A Short Practice of Midwifery, embodying the 
 
 Treatment adopted in the Rotunda Hospital, Dublin. By Hknry 
 Jellett, M.D., Assistant Master, Rotunda Hospital. With 45 Illua- 
 tratioDB. Crown Svo, 68. 
 
 7, GREAT MAliLBOROUGH STREET. 
 
J. ^ A. Churchill^ 8 Recent Works. 
 Obstetric Aphorisms : for the Use of Students 
 
 coiniiH-iicin;; Midwifery Pnictice. Uy Joski'H G. Swaynk, M.D., 
 Lecturer on Midwifery in the I5risl^)l Medical School. Tenth Edition. 
 Fc;ip. 8vo, with 20 Kii^^nivinf^s. .'?s. »5<i. 
 
 Economics, Anaesthetics, and Antiseptics in 
 
 the rractice of Midwifery. By Havdn BUOWN, L.K.C.r., L.K.C.S. 
 Edin. Fcap. Svo, 2s. 0*1. 
 
 Lectures on Obstetric Operations : including 
 
 the Treatment of Ha-morrhafje, and forming,' a Guide to the Manajje- 
 ment of Difficult Labour. By Kobkkt Barnes, M.D., F.K.C.P., 
 Consultiu},' Obstetric Physician to St. Georjre's Hospifcil. Fourth 
 Edition. Svo, with 121 Engravin^rs, 12s. 6d. 
 By the same Author. 
 
 A Clinical History of Medical and Surgical 
 
 Diseases of Women. Second Edition. Svo, with 181 Enfrravinf^s, 288. 
 
 Gynaecological Operations (Handbook of). 
 
 By Alhan H. G. Doran, F.R.C.S., Surgeon to the Samaritan Hospital. 
 8vo, with 1()7 Engravings, 15s. 
 
 Diseases of Women. (Student's Guide Series.) 
 
 By Alfhkd L. Galabin, M.A., M.D., F.K.C.P., Obstetric Phy- 
 sician to, and Lecturer on Midwifery and Diseases of Women at, 
 Guy's Hospital. Fifth Edition, Fcap. Svo, with li2 Engravings, 8s. 6d. 
 
 Manual of the Diseases peculiar to Women. 
 
 By James Oliver, M.D., F.K.S.E.. M.K.C.P., Physician to the 
 Hospital for Diseases of Women, London. Fcap. Svo, 3s. 6d. 
 By the same Author. 
 
 Abdominal Tumours and Abdominal Dropsy 
 
 in Women. Crown Svo, 7s. 6d. 
 
 A Practical Treatise on the Diseases of 
 
 Women. By T. Gaillard Thomas, M.D. Sixth Edition, by Paul 
 F. MuNDE, M.D., Professor of Gynaecology at the New York 
 Polyclinic and at Dartmouth College. Koy. Svo, with 347 Engrav- 
 ings, 25s. 
 
 Sterility. By Egbert Bell, M.D., F.F.P. & S. Glasg., 
 
 Senior Physician to the Glasgow Hospital for Diseases peculiar to 
 Women. Svo, 5s. 
 
 A First Series of Fifty-four Consecutive Ovario- 
 tomies, with Fifty-three Eecoveries. By A. C. Butler-Smythe, 
 F.K.C.P. Edin., Surgeon to the Samaritan Free Hospital, Senior 
 Surgeon to the Grosvenor Hospital for Women and Children. Svo, 
 (3s. t)d. 
 
 7, GREAT MARLBOROUGH STREET. 
 
J, 8f A, ChurchilVs Recent Works, 
 
 A Manual for Hospital Nurses and others en- 
 
 gafjed in AtteiKiinfj on the Sick. By K. J. Domvii.lk, Surgeon to 
 the Devon and Exeter Hospital. Eighth Edition. Crown 8vo, 2s. t5(l. 
 
 A Manual of Nursing, Medical and Surgical. 
 
 By Charles J. Cullingworth, M.D., F.R.C.P., Obstetric Physician 
 to St. Thomas's Hospital. Third Edition. Fcap. 8vo, 28. «5d. 
 By the same Author. 
 
 A Short Manual for Monthly Nurses. 
 
 IJevised by M. A. Atkinson. Pourth Edition. Fc;ip. 8\o, Is. M. 
 
 Notes on Gynaecological Nursing. By John 
 
 Bknjamin Hellier, M.D., M.K.C.S. Lecturer on the Diseases of 
 Women ami Children in the Yorksliire College, and Surgeon to the 
 Hospital for Women, etc., Leeds. Crown 8vo, Is. 6d. 
 
 Lectures on Medicine to Nurses. By Herbert 
 
 E. Cuff, M.D., F.ll C.S., Me.lical Superintendent, North Eastern 
 Fever HospiUxl, London. Second Edit. on. With 2i) Illustrationd. 
 Crown 8vo, ;-!s. 6d. 
 
 Antiseptic Principles for Nurses. By C. E. 
 
 Richmond, F.ll.C.S. Fcnp. 8vo, Is. 
 
 A Practical Treatise on Disease in Children. 
 
 By Eustace Smith, M.D., F.Il.C.P., Physician to the King of the 
 Belgians, and to the East London Hospital for Children, etc. Second 
 Edition. 8vo, 22s. 
 
 By the same Author. 
 
 Clinical Studies of Disease in Children. 
 
 Second Edition. Post 8vo, 7s. 6d. 
 
 Also. 
 
 The Wasting Diseases of Infants and 
 
 Children. Fifth Edition Post 8vo, 8s. 6d. 
 
 The Diseases of Children. (Student's Guide 
 
 Series.) By Jas. F. Goophakt, M.D., F.R.C.P., Physician to Guy's 
 Hospital. Fifth Edition. FcJip. 8vo, 10s. 6d. 
 
 Manual of Diseases of Children, for Prac- 
 titioners and Students. By W. H. Day, M.D., Physician to the 
 Samaritan Hospital. Second E(iition. Crown 8vo, 12s. M. 
 
 On the Natural and Artificial Methods of Feed- 
 ing Infants and Young Children. By Edmum* Caitley. M.D., 
 Physician to the Belgrave Hospital for Children. Crown 8vo, 7s. M. 
 
 Materia Medica, Pharmacy, Pharmacology, 
 
 and Therapeutics. By W. Hale White, M.D., F.U.C.P., Physician 
 to, and Lecturer on Pharmaeul(>gy and Therapeutics at, Guy's 
 Host)itjil. Third Edition, based upon the B.P. of I8it8. Faip. 8vo. 
 73. 6d. 
 
 7, GREAT MARLBOROUGH STREET. 
 
J. 8[ A. Churchill^ a Recent Works, 
 Materia Medica and Therapeutics. By Charles 
 
 I). V. raiLLii'S, M.l)., LL.I)., K.K.S. E.liii. 
 Ve^eUibU' Kiiifjtlom — Orji^anic Compounds— An iin;ilKin[idom. 8vo, 25s. 
 Inorj^anic Sul)stances. Second Kdition. 8vo, 21s. 
 
 Practical Pharmacy: an Account ot the 
 
 Met.lio Is of Manufactiuinj; and Dispensioj^ Pharmaceutijal Prepara- 
 tions; with a chapter on tlie Analysis of Urine. By E. W. Lucas, 
 F.C.S., Examiner .at the Pharmaceutical Society, AVith 2t<3 Illustra- 
 tions. IJoy. 8vo, 12s. G<1. 
 
 Galenic Pharmacy : a Practical Handbook to 
 
 the Processes of the British Pharmacopoeia. By It. A Cripps, M.P.S. 
 8vo, with 76 Engravings, 8s. 6d. 
 
 Practical Pharmacy. By Barnard S. Proctor. 
 
 Third Edition. 8vo, with Enf^ravings and Fac-simile Prescriptions, 14b. 
 
 The Galenical Preparations of the British 
 
 Pharmacopceia; a Handbook for Medical and Pharmaceutical Students. 
 By C. O. Hawthornk, M.B., CM., Lecturer on Materia Medica and 
 Therapeutics, Queen Margaret's College, Glasgow. 8vo, 4s. 6d. 
 
 Pereira's Selecta e Prescriptis : containing 
 
 Lists of Terms used in Prescriptions, with Explanatory Notes, etc. 
 Also, a Series of Abbreviated Prescriptions with Translations 
 Eighteenth Edition, by Joseph Ince. 24mo, 5s. 
 
 The Pharmaceutical Formulary ; a Synopsis 
 
 of tiie British and Foreign Pharniacopceias. By Henuv Bka-slev. 
 Twelfth Edition by J. Oluha.m Bhaithwaite 18mo, 6s. 6d. 
 
 By the same Author. 
 
 The Druggist's General Receipt-Book. Tenth 
 
 Edition. 18mo, 6s. 6d. 
 
 Also. 
 
 The Book of Prescriptions : containing upwards 
 
 of .3,000 Prescriptions collected from the Practice of the most eminent 
 Physicians and Surgeons, English and Foreign. Seventh Edition, 
 18mo, 6s. 6d. 
 
 A Companion to the British Pharmacopoeia. 
 
 By Peter Squire, Revised by his Sons, P. W. and A. H. Squire. 
 Sixteenth Edition. 8vo, 12s. 6d. 
 
 By the same Authors. 
 
 The Pharmacopoeias of the London Hospitals, 
 
 arranged in Groups for Easy Reference and Comparison. Sixth 
 Edition. 18mo, 6s. 
 
 7, GREAT MARLBOROUGH STREET. 
 
J. 8f A. ChurchilVs Recent Works, 
 
 Royle's Manual of Materia Medica and 
 
 Thenipeutics. Sixth Edition, includirifj additions and alterations 
 in the B.P. 1885. By John Harlev, M.D., Phjsician to St. Thomas's 
 Hospitiil. Crown 8vo, with 1U9 Enjjraviiiffs, Lis. 
 
 Southall's Organic Materia Medica, being a 
 
 Handbook treatinj^ of some of tlie more important of tlic Animal and 
 Vegetable Drugs made use of in Medicine, including the whole of 
 those contained in the British Pharmacopoeia. Fifth and Enlarged 
 Edition, by JouN Barclay, B.Sc.Lond., some time Lecturer on 
 Materia Medica and Pharmacy in Mason Ccllege, Birmingham. 
 8vo, 6s. 
 
 Recent Materia Medica and Drugs occasion- 
 ally Prescribed. Notes on their Origin and Therapeutics. By F. 
 Harwood Lescher, F.C.S., Pereira Medallist. Fifth E<lition. 8vo, is. 
 
 Year-Book of Pharmacy: containing the Trans- 
 actions of the British Pharmaceutical Conference. Annually. 8vo, lOs. 
 
 Manual of Botany, in two Vols., crown 8vo. 
 
 By J. Keynolds Green, Sc.D., M.A., F.K.S., Professor of Botany to 
 
 the Pharmaceutical Society. 
 
 Vol. I. : Morphology and Anatomy, with 788 Engravings. Second 
 
 Edition. 7s. 6d. 
 Vol. II. : Classification and Physiologj^ with 415 Engravings, 10s. 
 
 The Student's Guide to Systematic Botany, 
 
 including the CLissificixtion of Plants and Descriptive Botany. By 
 Robert Bentley, late Emeritus Professor of Botany in King's 
 College and to the Pharmaceuticiil Society. Fciip. bvo, with 350 
 Engravings, 38. 6d. 
 
 Medicinal Plants : being Descriptions with 
 
 original figures, of the Principal Plants employe.l in Medicine, and 
 an account of their Properties and Uses. By Prof. Bentley ami Dr. 
 H. Trimen, F.K.S. Iu 4 vols., large bvo, with 3Ut5 Coloured Plates, 
 bound in Half Morocco, Gilt Edges, £11 lis. 
 
 Practical Therapeutics : a Manual. By 
 
 Ejjwakju J. \VAKiN(i, C.I.E., M.l)., F.li.C.P., and Dudley W. 
 Buxton, M.D., B.S Loud. Fourth Edition. Crown bvo, Hs. 
 By the same Author. 
 
 Bazaar Medicines of India, and Common 
 
 Medical Plants. With Full Index of Diseases, indicating their Treat- 
 ment by these and other Agents procurable throughout India, etc. 
 Fifth Edition. Fcap. bvo, 5s. 
 
 7, GREAT MARLBOROUGH STREET. 
 
J, 4r -4» ChurchilVs Recent Works. 
 
 Climate and Fevers of India, with a Series 
 
 <)f Cases (Croon i.ui Lectures, 18S2). By Sir JoSKi-H Faykkk, 
 K.C.S.I., M.D, 8vo, with 17 Temperature Charts, 12s. 
 By the same Author. 
 
 The Natural History and Epidemiology of 
 
 Cholera : being the Annual Oration of the Medical Society of London, 
 18,S8. 8vo, :\s. M. 
 
 Psilosis or "Sprue": its Nature and Treat- 
 ment ; with Observations on various Forms of Diarrha?a acquired in 
 the Tropics. By George Thin, M.D. Second and Enlarged Edition, 
 with Illustrations. 8vo, 10s. 
 
 A Manual of Family Medicine and Hygiene 
 
 for India. Published under the Authority of the Gov^ernment of 
 India. By Sir William J. Moore, K.C.I.E., M.D., late Surgeon- 
 General with the Government of Bombay. Sixth Edition. Post Bvo, 
 with 71 Engravings, 12s. 
 
 By the same Author. 
 
 A Manual of the Diseases of India : with a 
 
 Compendium of Diseases generally. Second Edition. Post 8vo, 
 10s. 
 
 The Prevention of Disease in Tropical and 
 
 Sub-Troi)ical Campaigns. (Parkes Memorial Prize for 1886.) By 
 Lieut.-Col. Andrew Duncan, M.D., B.S. Lond., F.R.C.S., H.M. 
 Indian Medical Service. 8vo, 12s. 6d. 
 
 A Commentary on the Diseases of India. By 
 
 Norman Chevers, C.I.E., M.D., F.R.C.S., Deputy Surgeon-Geueral 
 H.M. Indian Army. 8vo, 21s. 
 
 Hooper's Physicians' Vade-Mecum : a Manual 
 
 of the Principles and Practice of Physic. Tenth Edition. By W. A. 
 Guy, F.R.C.P., F.R.S., and J. Hakley, M.D., F.RC.P. With 118 
 Engravings. Fc;ip. 8vo, 12s. 6d, 
 
 The Principles and Practice of Medicine. 
 
 (Text-book.) By the late C. Hilton Fagge, M.D., and P. H. 
 Pye-Smith, M.D., F.R.S., F.R.C.P., Physician to, and Lecturer on 
 Medicine at, Guy's Hospital. Third Edition. 2 vols. 8vo, cloth, -lOs. ; 
 Half Leather, 46s. 
 
 Manual of the Practice of Medicine. By 
 
 Frederick Taylor, M.D., F.R.C.P., Ph3"sician to, and Lecturer 
 on Medicine at, Guy's Hospital. Fifth Edition. Post 8vo, with 
 Engravings, Itis. 
 
 7, GREAT MARLBOROUGH STREET. 
 
 10 
 
J. 8f A. ChurchiWa Recent Works. 
 
 A Dictionary of Practical Medicine. By 
 
 various writers. Editerl by Jas. KiNfiSTON Fowlkr, M.A., M.D., 
 F.R.C.P., Physician to Middlesex Hospital and the Hospital for Con- 
 sumption. 8vo, cloth, 21s.; half ailf, 2o3. 
 
 The Practice of Medicine. (Student's Guide 
 
 Series.) By M. Chartkris, M.D., Professor of Tlierapeiif ics and 
 Materia Medioa in the University of Glas-jow. Seventh Edition. 
 Fciip. Svo, with Engravinfjs on Copper and Wood, 10s. 
 
 A Text-Book of Bacteriology for Students and 
 
 Practitioners of Medicine. By G. M. Stkrniskrg, M.I)., Siirfjeon- 
 General, U.S. Army. With 9 Plates and 200 Figures in the Text. 
 Svo, 248. 
 
 How to Examine the Chest : a Practical 
 
 Guide for the use of Stmlents. By Samuel West, M.D., F.K.C.P. 
 Assistant Physician to St. Bartholomew's Hospital. Second Edition. 
 With Engravings. Fcap. Svo, r,s. 
 
 An Atlas of the Pathological Anatomy of the 
 
 Lungs. By the late Wilson Fox, M.D., F.Il.S., F.K.C.P., 
 Physician to H.M. the Queen. With 4.i Plates (mostly Colonred) and 
 Engravings. 4to, half-bound in Calf, TOs. 
 
 By the same Author. 
 
 A Treatise on Diseases of the Lungs and 
 
 Pleuia. Edited by Sidney Coupland, M.D., F.K.C.P., Physician to 
 Middlesex Hospital. Roy. Svo, with Engravings ; also Portrait and 
 Memoir of the Author, 36s. 
 
 The Student's Guide to Diseases of the Chest. 
 
 By Vincent D. Harris, M.D. Lond., F.K.C.P., Physician to the City 
 of London Hospital for Diseases of the Chest, Victoria Park. Fcap. 
 Svo, with 55 Illustrations (some Coloured), 7s. 6d. 
 
 The Schott Methods of the Treatment of 
 
 Chronic Diseases of the Heart, with an account of the Naidieim Baths, 
 and of the Therapeutic Exercises. By W. Bezly Thorne, M.D., 
 M.R.C.P. Second Edition. Svo, with Illustrations, 5s. 
 
 Guy's Hospital Reports. By the Medical and 
 
 Surgical SUiff. Vol. XXXVII. Third Series. Svo, lOs. 6d. 
 
 St. Thomas's Hospital Reports. By the Medical 
 
 and Svir}4ic:il Staff. Vol. XXIV. New Series. Hvo, .'^s. f„l 
 
 Westminster Hospital Reports. By the Medical 
 
 and Surgical Staff. Vol. X. Svo, 8s. 
 
 7, GREAT MAnLBOROUGH l<TREET. 
 
 11 
 
J. 8f A. ChurchilVs Recent Works. 
 
 Medical Diagnosis. (Student's Guide Series.) 
 
 By Samikl Fknwick, M.I)., F.li.C.P., iuid W. Soltau Fknwick, 
 M.I)., B.8. Ei};lith Kilition. C'lowii Svo, with l.'Jo Engravin{{s, its. 
 By the same Authors 
 
 Outlines of Medical Treatment. Fourth Edition. 
 
 Crown S\o, witli .■{."> Eiijjnivinj^s, K's. 
 
 Also, by Dr. Samuel Fenwick 
 
 Clinical Lectures on some Obscure Diseases 
 
 of tilt' Abdomen. Delivered at the London HospitJil. 8vo, with 
 l!ln};ia\ iiif^s, 7s. 6d. 
 
 And 
 
 The Saliva as a Test for Functional Diseases 
 
 of llie Liver, down Svo, 2s. 
 
 The Microscope in Medicine. By Lionel S. 
 
 Bkale, M.B., F.K.S., Consulting Ph3'^sician to King's College Hos- 
 pital. Fourth Edition. Svo, with 86 plates, 21s. 
 By the same Author. 
 
 The Liver. With 24 Plates (85 Figures). Svo, 5s. 
 
 Also. 
 
 On Slight Ailments : and on Treating Disease. 
 
 Fourth Edition. Svo, .5s. 
 
 Myxoedema and the Thyroid Gland. By John 
 
 D. GiMLETTE, M.K.C.S., L.ILC.P. Crown Svo. 5s. 
 
 The Blood : how to Examine and Diagnose 
 
 its Diseases. By Alfred C. Coles, M.D., B.Sc, With (3 Coloured 
 Plates. Svo, 10s. 6d. 
 
 The Physiology of the Carbohydrates ; their 
 
 Application as Food and Kelation to Diabetes. By F. W. Pavy, M.D., 
 LL.D., F.R.S., F.R.C.P., Consulting Physician to Guy's Hospital. 
 
 Roj'ul Svo, with Plates and Engravings, 10s. Gd. 
 
 Medical Lectures and Essays. By Sir G. 
 
 Johnson, M.D., F.K.C.P., F.K.S., Consulting Physician to King's 
 College HospitJil. Svo, with 46 Engravings, 2.js. 
 By the same Author. 
 
 An Essay on Asphyxia (Apnosa). Svo, 3s. 
 
 Also. 
 
 History of the Cholera Controversy, with 
 
 Directions for the Treatment of the Disease. Svo, 3s. 
 
 7, GREAT MARLBOROUGH STREET. 
 
 12 
 
J, Sf A. Churchill h Rorcnt Worlcft. 
 
 Uric Acid as a Factor in the Causation of 
 
 Disease. By Ai.kxandkr Haig, M.D., F.K.C.P. Pliysiciaii t/i the 
 Metropolit^iii Hospitiil and the Itoyal HospiUil for Chiltlreu and 
 Women. Fourtli Edition. 8\o, with 6Ji Ilhistrations, llis. Od. 
 
 Bronchial Asthma : its Pathology and Treat- 
 ment. By J. B. Bkkkaut, M.D., late Pliysician to the City of 
 London Hospital for Diseases of the Chest. Second Edition, with 7 
 
 Plates (8r> Fi{,Mires). 8vo, 10s. 6d. 
 
 Treatment of Some of the Forms of Valvular 
 
 Disease of the Heart. By A. E. Sansom, M.D., F.K.C.P., Physician 
 to the London Hospital. Second E<lition. Fcap. 8\o, with 'M Engrav- 
 ings, 4s. M. 
 
 Medical Ophthalmoscopy: a Manual and Atlas. 
 
 By Sir William K. Gowkks, M.P., F.K.C.P., F.K.S. Tliird Editim, 
 Edited with the assistance of Makcts Gunn, M.B., F.K.C.S., Snrgeon 
 to the Royal London Ophtiialmic Hospital. With Coloured Plates 
 and Woodcuts. 8vo, 16s. 
 
 By the same Author. 
 
 A Manual of Diseases of the Nervous System. 
 Vol. I. — Spinal Cord and Nerves. Second 
 
 Edition. Roy. 8vo, with 179 Eii<,na\ ings, l^s. 
 
 Vol.11. — Brain and Cranial Nerves : General 
 
 and Functional Diseases of the Nervous System. Second Edition. 
 Roy. 8vo, with 182 Engravings, 20s. 
 
 Also. 
 
 Clinical Lectures on Diseases of the Nervous 
 
 System. Bvo 7s. M. 
 
 Also. 
 
 Diagnosis of Diseases of the Brain. Second 
 
 E<lition. 8vo, with Engravings, 7s. »5d. 
 
 Also. 
 
 Syphilis and the Nervous System : being a 
 
 Revised Reprint of the Lettsnmian Lectures for 1S9(». Dclivtred l>efore 
 the Medical Societj- of London. 8vo, Js. 
 
 The Nervous System, Diseases of. By J. A. 
 
 Okmerop, M.D., F.K.C.P., Pliysician to the National Hospital for the 
 Paralysed and Epileptic. With 66 Illustrations. Fcap. 8vo, 8s. 6d. 
 
 7, GREAT MABLBOBOUGH STBEET. 
 
 13 
 
J. 8f A. Churchill* 8 Recent Works, 
 
 Text-Book of Nervous Diseases for Students 
 
 and PrartitioTiers of Mctliriiie. By Charlks L. Dana, M.I)., Pro- 
 fi'ssor of Nervous and M(Mit;il Diseases in Delleviie Hospital Medical 
 Colle^^e, New York. Fourth Kditioii. Wit li 21(5 Illustrations. .Svo,2iis. 
 
 Diseases of the Nervous System. Lectures 
 
 delivered at Guy's Hospital. By Sir Samukl Wxlks, Lart., M.I)., 
 F.U.S. Second Kdition. fS\o, lbs. 
 
 Handbook of the Diseases of the Nervous 
 
 System. By James Koss, M.D., F.U.C.P., late Professor of Medicine 
 in the Victoria University, and Phj'sician to the Koyal Infirmary, 
 Manchester. Hoy. 8vo, with 184 Enjfravings, 18s. 
 
 By the same Author. 
 
 Aphasia : being a Contribution to the Subject 
 
 of the Dissolution of Speech from Cerebral Disease. 8vo, with En- 
 gravings, 4s. 6d. 
 
 Stammering : its Causes, Treatment, and 
 
 Cure. By A. G. Bkrnakd, M.R.C.S.. L.R.C.P. Crown 8vo, 2s. 
 
 Secondary Degenerations of the Spinal Cord 
 
 (Gulstonian Lectures, 1889). By Howard H. Tooth, M.D., F.R.C.P., 
 Assistant Physician to the National Hospital for the Paralysed and 
 Epileptic. With Plates and Engravings. 8vo, 38. 6d. 
 
 Diseases of the Nervous System. Clinical 
 
 Lectures. By Thomas Buzzakd, M.D., F.R.C.P., Physician to the 
 National Hotpital for the Paralysed and Epileptic. With Engravings. 
 8vo, 158. 
 
 By the same Author. 
 
 Some Forms of Paralysis from Peripheral 
 
 Neuritis ; of Gouty, Alcoholic, Diphtheritic, and other origin. Crown 
 8vo, .5s. 
 
 Also. 
 
 On the Simulation of Hysteria by Organic 
 
 Disease of the Nervous Sj^stem. Crown 8vo, 4s. 6d. 
 
 Gout in its Clinical Aspects. By J. Mortimer 
 
 Grantille, M.D. Crown 8vo, 6s. 
 
 Diseases of the Liver : with and without 
 
 Jaundice. By Georok Harley, M.D., F.R.C.P., F.R.S. 8vo, with2 
 Plates and '.K Engravings, 21s. 
 
 Rheumatic Diseases (Differentiation in). By 
 
 Hugh Lank, Surgeon to the Roj\al Mineral Water Hospital, Bath. 
 Second Edition, much Enlarged, with 8 Plates. Crown 8vo, 38. 6d. 
 
 7, GBEAT MABLBOBOUGH STREET. 
 
 u 
 
J. 8f A. Churchill's Recent Works. 
 
 Diseases of the Abdomen, comprising those 
 
 of the Stomach and other parts of the Ah'montary Canal, CEsophafjiis, 
 Csecum, Intestines, and Peritoneum. By S. O. Habershon, M.I)., 
 F.R.C.P. Fourth Edition. 8vo, with 5 Plates, 21s. 
 
 On Gallstones, or Cholelithiasis. By E. M. 
 
 Brockdank, M.D. Vict., M.lt.C.P. Loii.l., late Resident Me.lical 
 Officer at the Manchester Royal Infirmary and the Birmingham 
 General Hospital. Crown 8vo, 7s. 
 
 On the Relief of Excessive and Dangerous 
 
 Tympanites hy puncturing the Abdomen. By John W. ()(iLK, M.D., 
 Consulting Physician to St. George's Hospital. 8vo, os. 6d. 
 
 Headaches : their Nature, Causes, and Treat- 
 ment. 'By W. H. Day, M.D., Physician to the Samaritan Hospital. 
 Fourth Edition. Crown Bvo, with Engravings, 7s. 6d. 
 
 A Handbook of Medical Climatology, embody- 
 ing its Principles and Tlierapeulic Application, wit ii Scientific Data 
 of the chief Health Resorts of the World. By S. Edwin Solly, M.D., 
 M.R.C.S., late President of the American Climatological Association. 
 With Engravings and Coloured Plates. 8vo, 16s. 
 
 The Mineral Waters of France, and its 
 
 Wintering Stations (Medical Guide to). With a Special Map. By A. 
 ViNTRAS, M.D., Physician to the French Embassy, and to the French 
 Hospital, London. Second Edition. Crown 8vo, Ss. 
 
 Surgery : its Theory and Practice. By William 
 
 J. Walsham, F.R.C.S., Senior Assistant Surgeon to, and Lecturer 
 on Anatomy at, St. Bartholomews Hospital. Sixth Edition. Crown 
 8vo, with 410 Engravings, 12s. 6d. 
 
 A Synopsis of Surgery. By R. F. Tobin, 
 
 Surgeon to St. Vincent's Hospital, Dublin. Crown 8vo, interleaved, 
 leather binding, (58. (3d. 
 
 Surgical Emergencies : together with the 
 
 Emergencies attendant on Parturition and the Treatment of Pois<m- 
 ing. By Paul Swain, F.R.C.S., Surgeon to the South Devon 
 and East Cornwall Hospital. Fifth Edition. Crown 8vo, with 149 
 Engravings, 63. 
 
 Illustrated Ambulance Lectures : (to which is 
 
 added a Nursing Lkcturk) in accordance with the Regulations of the 
 St. John's Ambulance Association for Male and Female Class«'8. By 
 John M. H. Martin, M.D., F.R.C.S., Hon. Surgeon to the Blackburn 
 Infirmary. Fourth Edition. Crown Bvo, with 60 Engravings, 2b. 
 
 7, GREAT MARLBOROUGH STREET. 
 
 15 
 
J. ^' A. ChurchilV^ Recent Works, 
 
 Operations on the Brain (a Guide to). By 
 
 Alkc Fraskr, Professor of Anatomy, Hoyal CoUefje of Surgeons 
 in Ireland. Illustrated by 42 life-size Plates in Autotype, and 2 
 Woodeuts in tlie t<'xt. Folio, (i.'^s. 
 
 Abdominal Surgery. By J. Greig Smith, M.A., 
 
 F.U.S.E. Sixth Edition. E<Hted by Jamks Swain, M.S., M.D. Lond., 
 F.lt.C.S. Eng., Assistant-Surj^eon to the Bristol Itoyal Infirmary, 
 Professor of Surj^erj', University College, Bristol. 2 vols., 8vo, with 
 224 Ent^ravinfiS, .*^6s. 
 
 The Physiology of Death from Traumatic 
 
 Fever; a Study in Abdominal Surgery. By John D. Malcolm, 
 M.B., CM., F.li.C.S.E., Surgeon to the Samaritan Free Hospital. 
 8vo, ns. 6d. 
 
 The Surgery of the Alimentary Canal. By 
 
 Alfred Ernest Maylard, M.B. Lond. and B.S., Surgeon to the 
 Vietoria Infirmary, Glasgow. With 27 Swantype Plates and 89 
 Figures in the Text, 8vo, 2")S. 
 
 Surgery. By C. "W. Mansell Moullin, M.A., 
 
 M.D. Oxon., F.R.C.S., Surgeon and Lecturer on Pliysiology to the 
 London Hospital. Large 8vo, with 497 Engravings, .34s. 
 
 A Course of Operative Surgery. By Chris- 
 
 topher Heath, Surgeon to University College Hospital. Second 
 Edition. With 20 Coloured Plates (180 figures) from Nature, by 
 M. L^VElLL^, and several Woodcuts. Large 8vo, 30s. 
 By the same Author. 
 
 The Student's Guide to Surgical Diagnosis. 
 
 Second Edition. Feap. 8vo, 6s. 6d. 
 
 Also. 
 
 Manual of Minor Surgery and Bandaging. For 
 
 the use of House-Surgeons, Dressers, and Junior Practitioners. 
 Eleventh Edition. Fcap. 8vo, with 176 Engravings, 6s. 
 
 Also. 
 
 Injuries and Diseases of the Jaws. Fourth 
 
 Edition. Edited by Henry Percy' Dean, M.S., F.R.C.S., Assistant 
 Surgeon to the London Hospital. 8vo, with 187 Wood Engravings, Hs. 
 
 Aiso. 
 
 Lectures on Certain Diseases of the Jaws. 
 
 Delivered at the K.C.S., England, 1887. 8vo, with 64 Engravings, 
 2s. 6d. Also. 
 
 Clinical Lectures on Surgical Subjects. De- 
 livered in University College Hospital. Second Edition, enlarged. 
 Fcap. 8vo, with 27 Engravings, Bs. 
 
 7, GREAT MARLBOROUGH STREET. 
 
 16 
 
J. 8f A. ChurchilVH Recent Works. 
 
 The Practice of Surgery : a Manual. By 
 
 Thomas Buyaxt, Consulting Snr<,'«-on to Gii.v's Hospitnl. F.nirth 
 Edition. 2 vols, crown 8vo, with 7.=.0 EnKravin«8 (m.iny being 
 Coloured), an«\ including 6 chromo plates, :?2s. 
 
 The Surgeon's Vade-Mecum : a Manual of 
 
 Moiiern Surgery. By K. Druitt, F.K.C.S. Twelfth Edition. By 
 Stanlf.y Boyd, M.B., F.K.C.S., Assistant Surgeon and Pathologist 
 to Charing Cross Hospitnl. Crown 8vo, with :{7:{ Engravings, lf,s. 
 
 The Operations of Surgery : intended for use 
 
 on the De.ad and Living Subject alike. By W. H. A. Jacobson. 
 MA MB, M.Ch. Oxon., F.K.C.S., Assistant Surgeon to, and 
 Lecturer on Anatomy at, Guy's Hospital. Third Edition. 8vo, with 
 401 Illustrations, lUs. 
 
 Ovariotomy and Abdominal Surgery. By 
 
 Hahhiso.v Cuipps, F.K.C.S., Surgical Staff, St. Bartholomews 
 Hospital. With numerous Plates, royal 8vo, 2'>s. 
 
 Diseases of Bones and Joints. By Charles 
 
 Mac.vamaka, F.K.C.S., Surgeon to, and Lecturer on Surgery at, the 
 Westminster Hospital. 8vo, with Plates and Engravings, 12s. 
 
 On Anchylosis. By Bernard E. Brodhurst, 
 
 F.K.C.S., Surgeon to the Koyal Orthop?edic Hospital. Ft)urth 
 Edition. Svo, with Engravings, h&. 
 
 By the same Author. 
 
 Curvatures and Disease of the Spine. Fourth 
 
 Edition. Svo, with Engravings, 7s. 6d. 
 
 Also, 
 
 Talipes Equino- Varus or Club -Foot. Svo, 
 
 with Engravings, 3s. 6d. 
 
 Also. 
 
 Observations on Congenital Dislocation of the 
 
 Hip. Third Edition, svo, L^s. <»!. 
 
 Surgical Pathology and Morbid Anatomy. 
 
 By ANTHOXY A. BOWLBY. F.K.C.S., Assistant Surgeon to St 
 
 Bartholomew's Hospital. Third Edition. Crown 8vo, with 183 
 Engravings, 10s. 6d. 
 
 By the same Author. . 
 
 Injuries and Diseases of Nerves, and their 
 
 Surgical Treatment. 8vo, with 20 Plates, Us. 
 
 7, GREAT MARLBOROUGH STREET. ^^ 
 
J, 8f A. ChurchilVs Recent Works, 
 The Human Foot : its Form and Structure, 
 
 Functions aiKl Clotliinfj. By Thomas S. Kllts, Consnltinj; Surgeon 
 • to the Gloucester Infirmary. With 7 Plates and EnfiravinKS (5) 
 Fif^urca). Svo, Ts. (id. 
 
 The Deformities of the Fingers and Toes. By 
 
 Wii.MAM Anpkrson, F.R.C.S., Surgeon to St. Thomas's Hospital. 
 Svo, with 1"^ engravings, (is. 
 
 Short Manual of Orthopaedy. By Heather 
 
 Bioo, F. II. C.S.Ed., Part I. Deformities and Deficiencies of the 
 Head and Neck. Svo, 2s. t5d. 
 
 Face and Foot Deformities. By Frederick 
 
 Churchill, CM. Svo, with Plates and Hlustrations, 10s. 6d. 
 
 Royal London Ophthalmic Hospital Reports. 
 
 By the Medical and Surgical Staff. Vol. XIV., Part 2. Svo, ^&. 
 
 Ophthalmological Society of the United King- 
 dom. Transactions. Vol. XVI. Svo, 12s. 6d. 
 
 Manual of Ophthalmic Surgery and Medicine. 
 
 By W. H. H. Jessop, M.A., F.ll.C.S., Oplithalmic Surgeon to St. Bar- 
 tholomew's Hospital. With 5 Coloured Plates and 110 Wcodcuts. 
 Crown Svo, f)s. 6d. 
 
 Nettleship's Diseases of the Eye. Sixth Edition. 
 
 Revised and Edited by W. T. Holmes Spicer, M.B., F.R.C.S., Oph- 
 thalmic Surgeon to the Metropolitan Hospital and the Victoria 
 Hospital for Children. With 161 Engravings and a Coloured Plate 
 illustrating Colour-Blindness. Crown Svo, 8s. (5d. 
 
 Diseases and Refraction of the Eye. By 
 
 N. C. Macnamara, F.R.C.S., Surgeon to Westminster Hospital, and 
 GuSTAVUS Hartridge, F.R.C.S., Surgeon to the Royal Westminster 
 Ophthalmic Hospital. Fifth Edition. Crown Svo, with Plate, 156 
 Engravings, also Test-types, lOs. 6d. 
 
 On Diseases and Injuries of the Eye: a Course 
 
 of Systematic and Clinical Lectures to Students and Medical 
 Practitioners. By J. R. Wolfe, M.D., F.R.C.S.B. With 10 Coloured 
 Plates and 157 Wood Engravings. Svo, 21s. 
 
 Convergent Strabismus, and its Treatment, 
 
 an Essay. By EmviN Holthouse, M.A., F.R.C.S., Surgeon to the 
 Western Ophthalmic Hospital. Svo, 6s. 
 
 7, GREAT MARLBOROUGH STREET. 
 
 18 
 
J. 8f A. Churchill ^8 Recent Works. 
 
 Normal and Pathological Histology of the 
 
 Human Eye aiui Eyelids. By C. Frkd, Polt-ock, M.I)., PMl.C.S., 
 and F.K.S.E., Surf^eon for Diseases of the Eye to Anderson's Collefre 
 Dispensary, Glasgow. Crown Svo, with KX) Plates (2.'?0 drawings), l.=i8. 
 
 Atlas of Ophthalmoscopy. Composed of 12 
 
 Chromo-lithoffraphic Plates (r)9 Fif^iues drawn from nature) and 
 E.xpl.anatory Text. By Richard Likbrkich, M.K.C.S. Translated by 
 H. RosBOROUGH SWANZY, M.B. Third Edition, 4to, 40s. 
 
 Refraction of the Eye : a Manual for Students. 
 
 By GuSTAVUS Hartridge, F.R.C.S., Sur<;eon to the Royal West- 
 minster Ophthalmic Hospital. Ninth Edition. Crown Svo, with 
 101 niustrations, also Test-types, etc., 6s. 
 
 By the same Author. 
 
 The Ophthalmoscope : a Manual for Students. 
 
 Third Edition. Crown Svo, with 63 Illustrations and 4 Plates, 4s. 6d. 
 
 Glaucoma : its Pathology and Treatment. By 
 
 Priestlf.y Smith, Oplithalmic Surj^eon to the Queen's Hospital, 
 Birmini^ham. Svo, with 04 Engravings and 12 Zinco-photographs. 
 
 76. 6d. 
 
 Hints on Ophthalmic Out-Patient Practice. 
 
 By Charles Higgens, Ophthalmic Surgeon to Guy's Hospital. 
 Third Edition. Fcap. Svo, '.is. 
 
 Methods of Operating for Cataract and 
 
 Secondary Impairments of Vision, with the results of 500 cases. 
 By Major G. H. Fink, H.M. Indian Medical Service. Crown Svo, 
 with 15 Engravings, 58. 
 
 Diseases of the Eye : a Practical Handbook 
 
 for General Practitioners and Students. By Cecil EnwARU Shaw, 
 M.D., M.Ch., Ophtlialmic Surgeon to the Ulster Hospital for Children 
 and Women, Belfast. With a Test-Card for Colour-Blindness. Crown 
 Svo, .'Js. 6d. 
 
 Eyestrain (commonly called Asthenopia). By 
 
 Ernest Clarke, M.D., B.S. LomK, Surgeon to the Central Lonilon 
 Oplithalmic Hospital, Surgeon and Ophthalmic Surgeon to the 
 Miller Hospital. Second Edition. Svo, with 22 Illustrations, 58. 
 
 7, GREAT MARLBOROUGH STREET. 
 
J, 8f A. ChurchilVs Recent Works. 
 
 Diseases and Injuries of the Ear. By Sir 
 
 VVn.i.iANf 13. Dai, BY, F.H.C.S., M.P., CNnisultinfj Aural Smtrpoii 1o 
 St. O<'or;;(''s Hospital. Fourth Edition. CiovMi bvo, with 8 Coloured 
 I'Lites and 38 Wood Kn<ira\ iuj^s. Ids. tid. 
 By the same Author. 
 
 Short Contributions to Aural Surgery, between 
 
 lS7.'>a7id IMtti. Third Edition. Rvo, witli Eni,na\ in<rs, .">s. 
 
 Diseases of the Ear, including the Anatomy 
 
 and Physiology of tlie Organ, together with the Treatment of the 
 Affections of the Nose and Pliarynx, which conduce to Aural Disease 
 (a Treatise). By T. Mark Hovkll, F.K.C.S.E., M.K.C.S. ; Aural 
 SurgeoTi to the London Hospital, and Lecturer on Diseases of tlie 
 Throat in the College, etc. 8vo, with 122 Engravings, 18s. 
 
 A System of Dental Surgery. By Sir John 
 
 TOMK.S. F.1{.S., and C. S. Tombjs, M.A., F.R.S. Fourth Edition. Pest 
 Svo,with 2Sfl Engravings, Kis. 
 
 Dental Anatomy, Human and Comparative : 
 
 A Manual. By Charles S. Tomks, M.A., F.R.S. Fifth Edition. 
 Post 8vo, with 2ti.S Engravings, 14s. 
 
 Dental Materia Medica, Pharmacology and 
 
 Therapeutics. By Ciiarlks W. Gi.assington, M.R.C.S., L.D.S. 
 Edin.; Senior Dental Surgeon, Westminster Hospital; Dental Sur- 
 geon, National Dental Hospital, and Lecturer on Dental Materia 
 Medica ami Therapeutics to the College. Crown 8vo, t^s. 
 
 A Manual of Dental Metallurgy. By Ernest 
 
 A. Smith, F.I.C, Assistant Instructor in Metallurgy, Royal College 
 of Science, London. With 37 Illustrations, crown Svo, 6s. 6d. 
 
 A Manual of Nitrous Oxide Anaesthesia. 
 
 By J. Frederick W. Silk, M.D. Lend., M.R.C.S., Assistant 
 Anaesthetist to Guy's Hospital, Anesthetist to the Dental School of 
 Guy's Hospital, and to the Royal Free Hospital. Svo, with 26 En- 
 gravings, OS. 
 
 Practical Treatise on Mechanical Dentistry. 
 
 By Joseph Richardson, M.D., D.D.S. Seventh Edition, revised and 
 edited by George W. Warren, D.D.S. Royal Svo, with 690 Engrav- 
 ings, 22s. 
 
 Leprosy in British Guiana. By John D. Hillis, 
 
 F.R.C.S., M.R.I. A., late Medical Superintendent of the Leper 
 Asylum, British Guiana. Imp. Svo, with 22 Lithographic Coloured 
 Plates and Wood Engravings, £1 lis. 6d. 
 
 7, GREAT MARLBOROUGH STREET. 
 
 20 
 
J. 8f A. ChurchilVs Recent Works. 
 A Handbook on Leprosy. By S. P. Impey, 
 
 M.l)., late Ckief and Medical Siipcriiitcinlcii) , Itolihcii Islaml Lfjier 
 and Lnnatic Asylums, Cape CoioTiy. VVitli ;$« I'late*, Mvo, l^s. 
 
 Diseases of the Skin (Introduction to the 
 
 study of). By P. H. Pyk-Smith, M.I)., F.IJ.S., F.K.C.P., Physician 
 to Guy's Ifospitiil. Crown 8v(), with 26 Enj^ravin^s, 7s. tjd. 
 
 A Manual of Diseases of the Skin, with an 
 
 Analysis (if L'o.OnO Consecutive Cases and a Foriiiulary. IJy Difncan 
 !<;. 13'l'LKLEV, MI)., New York. Fourth Edition, royal Itwiu,, tis. <"!. 
 
 Diseases of the Skin : a Practical Treatise for 
 
 students and Practitioners. By J. N. Hvdk, M.D., Professor of 
 Skin and Venereal Diseases, Kush Mediwil Collcf^e, Chicaj^o. Second 
 Edition. 8vo, with 2 Coloured Plates and 96 Enf^ravinf^s, 20s. 
 
 Skin Diseases of Children. By Geo. H. Fox, 
 
 M.I)., Clinical Professor of Diseases of the Skin, College of Physicians 
 and Surgeons, New York. With 12 Photogravure antl Chroniographic 
 Plates and GO Illustrations in the Text. Koj'al 8vo, 12s. 6<1. 
 
 Sarcoma and Carcinoma : their Pathology, 
 
 Diagnosis, and Treatment. By Henky T. Butlin, F.Il.C.S., Assistant 
 Surgeon to St. Bartholomew's Hospital. 8vo, with 4 Plates, 8s. 
 By the same Author. 
 
 Malignant Disease of the Larynx (Sarcoma 
 
 and Carcinoma). 8vo, with 5 Engravings, 58. 
 
 Also. 
 
 Operative Surgery of Malignant Disease. 8vo,148. 
 Cancers and the Cancer Process : a Treatise, 
 
 Practical and Theoretic. By IIkkbkut L. Snow, M.I)., Surgeon to 
 the Cancer Hospital, Brompton. Svo, with 15 Plates. 15s. 
 By the same Author. 
 
 The Re-appearance (Recurrence) of Cancer 
 
 after apparent Extirpation. 8vo, .^s. tjd. 
 
 Also. 
 
 The Palliative Treatment of Incurable Cancer. 
 
 Crown 8\-o, 2s. 6d. 
 
 Diagnosis and Treatment of Syphilis. By 
 
 Tom lioniNSON, M.D. St. And., Physician to the Western Skin Hos- 
 pital. Crown 8vo, .'Js. 6d. 
 
 By the same Author, 
 
 Eczema : its Etiology, Pathology, and Treat- 
 ment. Crown Svo, ^s. (3d. 
 
 Also. 
 
 Illustrations of Diseases of the Skin and 
 
 Syphilis, with liemarks. Fasc. I. with 3 Plates, imp. 4to, 58. 
 
 7, GREAT MARLBOROUGH STREET. 
 
 21 
 
J. iSf A. Churchill *8 Recent Works. 
 Cancerous Affections of the Skin (Epithelioma 
 
 Jiiul Kdikiit Ulci'i). 13y (JkuK(;kTiii\,M.D. Tost Svo, with 8 EiiKniv- 
 '"^'^' •''^- By the same Author: 
 
 Pathology and Treatment of Ringworm. 
 
 Svo, w ith 21 Eii;,'r;ivinffs, "is. 
 
 On Cancer : its Allies, and other Tumours : 
 
 tlicir Medical and Surgical Treatment. Uy F. A. Puuckll, M.D., 
 M.C., Surgeon to the Cancer Hospital, I3rompton. Svo, with 21 
 Knjjravings, 10s. (5d. 
 
 Urinary and Renal Derangements and Calcu- 
 lous Disorders. By Lionel S. Bealk, F.H.C.P., F.K.S., Phj'sician to 
 Kinjj's Collefje Hospital, Svo, 5s. 
 
 Chemistry of Urine : a Practical Guide to the 
 
 Analytical Examination of Diabetic, Albuminous, and Gouty Urine. 
 By Alfred H. Allen, F.I.C, F.C.S., Public Analj'st for the West 
 Hiding of Yorkshire, &c. Svo, with Engravings, 7s. 6d. 
 
 Clinical Chemistry of Urine (Outlines of the). 
 
 By C. A. MacMunn, M.A., M.D. Svo, with 64 Engravings and Plate 
 of Spectra, 93. 
 
 Diseases of the Male Organs of Generation. 
 
 By W. H. A. Jacobson, M.Ch.Oxon., P.E.C.S., Assistant-Surgeou to 
 Guy's Hospital. Svo, with 88 Engravings, 223. 
 
 Atlas of Electric Cystoscopy. By Dr. Emil 
 
 Bl'RCKIIARdt, late of the Surgical Clinique of the University of 
 Bale, and E. Hurry Fenwiok, F.R.C.S.. Surgeon to the London 
 Hospital and St. Peter's Hospital for Sfone. Koyal Svo, with 34 
 Coloured Plates, embracing S3 Figures. 21s. 
 
 Electric Illumination of the Bladder and 
 
 Urethra, as a Means of Diagnosis of Obscure Vesico-Urethral Diseases. 
 By E. Hurry Fenwick, F.R.C.S., Surgeon to London Hospital and 
 St. Peter's Hospital for Stone. Second Edition. 8vo, with 54 En- 
 gravings, 6s 6d. 
 
 By the Same Author. 
 
 Tumours of the Urinary Bladder. The Jack- 
 son ian Prize Essay of 1887, rewritten with 200 additional cases. In 
 four Fasciculi. Fas. I. Itoyal Svo, 5s. 
 
 Also. 
 
 The Cardinal Symptoms of Urinary Disease : 
 
 their Diagnostic Significance and Treatment. Svo, with 36 Illustra- 
 tions, 8s. 6d. 
 
 7, GREAT MARLBOnOUGH STREET. 
 
 22 
 
J. 8f A. ChurchilVs Recent Works, 
 
 By SIR HENRY THOMPSON, BART., F.R.C.S. 
 
 Diseases of the Urinary Organs. Clinical 
 
 Lectures. Eighth Edition. 8vo, with 121 En^raviiif^s, lOs. M. 
 
 Some Important Points connected with the 
 
 Surgery of the Urinary Organs. Lectures delivered in the It.C.S. 
 8vo, with 44 Engravings. Student's Edition, 2s. 6tl. 
 
 Practical Lithotomy and Lithotrity ; or, an 
 
 Inquiry into the Best Modes of llemoving Stone from the Bladder. 
 Third Edition. 8vo, with 87 Engravings, 10s. 
 
 The Preventive Treatment of Calculous Dis- 
 ease, and the Use of Solvent Kemedies. Third Edition. Cr. 8vo, 2s. Gd. 
 
 Tumours of the Bladder : their Nature, Sym- 
 ptoms, and Surgical Treatment. 8vo, with numerous Illustrations, .53. 
 
 Stricture of the Urethra, and Urinary Fistulae : 
 
 their Pathology and Treatment. Fourth E<lition. 8vo, with 74 En- 
 gravings, 6s. 
 
 The Suprapubic Operation of Opening the 
 
 Bladder for Stone and for Tumours. Svo, with Engravings, 38. 6d. 
 
 Introduction to the Catalogue ; being Notes 
 
 of 1,000 Cases of Calculi of the Bladder removed by the Author, and 
 now^ iu the Museum of K.C.S. Svo, 28.6d. 
 
 The Surgical Diseases of the Genito-Urinary 
 
 Organs, including Syphilis. By E. L. Keyes, M.D., Professor of 
 Genito-Urinary "Surgery, Sj^hiology, nnd Dermatology in Bellevue 
 Hospital Medical College, New York (a revision of Van Buken and 
 Keyks' Textrbook). Koy. 8vo, with 114 Engravings, 21s. 
 
 Lectures on the Surgical Disorders of the 
 
 Urinary Organs. By Keginald Hakrison, F.K.C.S., Surgeon to St. 
 Peter's Hospital. Fourth Edition. Svo, witli loG Eiignivings, 16s. 
 
 Syphihs. By Alfred Cooper, F.R.C.S., Con- 
 
 suiting Surgeon to the West London and the Lock Hospitals. Second 
 Edition. Edited by Edwakd Coxxekell, F.K.C.S., Surgeon (out- 
 patients) to the Loudon Lock Hospital. 8vo, with 24 Full-page 
 Plates (12 coloured), 188. 
 
 7, GREAT MARLBOROUGH I^TREET. 
 
 33 
 
e/. (5r -4. Churchill^ 8 Recent Works. 
 
 On Maternal Syphilis, including the presence 
 
 ainl n-cof^iiitioii of Syphilitic Pelvic Discasf in Women. By John 
 A. Suaw-Mackknzik", M.D. Willi Coloured Plates, bvo, lUs. <ul. 
 
 Diseases of the Rectum and Anus. By Alfred 
 
 Cooi'KK, F.K.C.S., Senior Surj^eon to St. Mark's Hospital for 
 Fistula; an«l F. SwiNFOKD Edwards, P.li.C.S., Senior Assistiint 
 Surj^fon to St. Mark's Hospital. Second Edition, with Illustrations. 
 8vo, 12s. 
 
 Diseases of the Rectum and Anus. By 
 
 Hakhison Ckh'I's, F.K.C.S., Assistiint Surgeon to St. Bartholomew's 
 Hospital, etc. Second Edition. 8vo, with 13 Lithographic Plates and 
 numerous Wood Engravings, 126. 6d. 
 
 By the same Author. 
 
 Cancer of the Rectum. Especially considered 
 
 with remird to its Surgical Treatment. Jacksonian Prize Essay. 
 Third Edition, 8vo, with 13 Plates and several Wood Engravings, 63. 
 
 Also 
 
 The Passage of Air and Faeces from the 
 
 Urethra. 8vo, 38. 6d. 
 
 A Medical Vocabulary : an Explanation of all 
 
 Terms and Phrases used in the various Departments of Medical Science 
 and Practice, their Derivation, Meaning, Application, and Pronuncia- 
 tion. By R. G. Mayne, M.D., LL.D. Sixth Edition, by W. W. 
 Wagstaffe, B.A., F.R.C.S. Crown 8vo, 10s. 6d. 
 
 A Short Dictionary of Medical Terms. Being 
 
 an Abridgment of Mayne's Vocabulary. Glmo, 23. 6d. 
 
 Dunglison's Dictionary of Medical Science. 
 
 Contiiining a full Explanation of its various Subjects and Terms, 
 with their Pronunciation, Accentuation, and Derivation. Twenty- 
 first Edition. By Kichard J. Dunglison, A.M., M.D. Eoyal 8vo, 36s, 
 
 Terminologia Medica Polyglotta : a Concise 
 
 Ijiternational Dictionary of Mediciil Terms (French, Latin, English, 
 (terman, Italian, Spanish, and Russian). By Theodore Maxwell, 
 M.D., B.Sc, F.R.C.S. Edin. Royal 8vo, l(3s. 
 
 A German- English Dictionary of Medical 
 
 Terms. By Frederick Treves, F.R.C.S., Surgeon to the London 
 Hospital ; and Hugo Lang, B.A. Crown 8vo, half-Persian calf, 12s, 
 
 7, GBEAT MARLBOROUGH STREET. 
 
 24 
 
J. ^ A. Churchill^ 8 Recent Works, 
 
 A Manual of Chemistry, Theoretical and Prac- 
 tical. By William A. Tilukn, D.Sc, F.ll.S., Professor of Chemistry 
 in the Koyal Collef(e of Science, London ; Examiner in Ciiemist ry to 
 the Department of bcience and Art. With 2 Plates and 143 Woodcuts, 
 crown 8vo, 10s. 
 
 Chemistry, Inorganic and Organic. With Ex- 
 periments. By Chaklks L. Bloxam. Eighth Edition, Ijy John 
 Millar Thomson, F.K.S., Professor of Chemistry in Kinj^'s Colle>/e, 
 London, and Arthuk G. Bloxam, Head of the Chemistry Di-piirt- 
 ment, tlie Goldsmiths' Institute, New Cross. 8vo, with 281 Engrav- 
 ings, 188. 6d. 
 
 By the same Author. 
 
 Laboratory Teaching ; or, Progressive Exer- 
 cises in Practical Cliemistry. Sixth Edition, by Arthur G. Bloxam. 
 Crown 8vo, with 80 Engravings, 68. 6d. 
 
 Watts' Organic Chemistry. Edited by William 
 
 A. TiLDKN, D.Sc, F.K.S., Professor of Chemistry, Koyal College of 
 Science, London. Second Edition. Crown 8vo, los. 
 
 Practical Chemistry, and Qualitative Analysis. 
 
 By Frank Clowks, D.Sc. Lond., Professor of Chemistry in the 
 University College, Nottingham. Sixth Edition. Post 8vo, with 84 
 Engravings and Frontispiece, 8s. 6d. 
 
 Quantitative Analysis. By Frank Clowes, 
 
 D.Sc. Lond., late Professor of Chemistry in the University College, 
 Nottingham, and J. Bkrnard Colkman, Assoc. K. C. Sci. Dublin ; 
 Professor of Chemistry, South-West London Polytechnic. Fourth 
 Edition. Post 8vo, with 117 Engravings, lOs. 
 By the same Authors. 
 
 Elementary Practical Chemistry and Qualita- 
 tive Analysis. With 5-1 Engravings, Post 8vo, 3s. Cd. 
 
 -4/50 
 
 Elementary Quantitative Analysis. With G2 
 
 Engravings, Post 8vo, 4s. Gd. 
 
 Qualitative Analysis. By R. Fresenius. Trans- 
 lated by Charlk.s E. Grovks, F.H.S. Tenth Edition. Svo, with 
 Coloured Plate of Spectra and Itj Engravings, 1.58. 
 
 By the same Author. 
 
 Quantitative Analysis. Seventh Edition. 
 
 Vol. I., Translated by A. Vacher. Svo, with 
 
 106 Engravings, 1.58. 
 
 Vol. II., Parts 1 to 5, Translated by C. E. Groves, 
 
 F.K.S. 8vo, with Engravings, 2s. 6d. each. 
 
 7, GREAT MARLBOROUGH STREET. 
 
J. <5r A. ChurchiWs Recent Works, 
 
 Inorganic Chemistry. By Sir Edward Frank- 
 
 i,AM>, K.O.B., D.C.L., LL.D., F.li.S., and Fkancis \i. Japi', M.A., 
 Ph.D., F.I.C., F.K.S., Professor of Chemistry in the University of 
 AlK-nieen. 8\ o, with numerous Ilhistrations on Stone and Wooii,"248. 
 
 Inorganic Chemistry (A System of). By 
 
 William Kamsay, Ph.D., F.Il.S., Professor of Chemistry in the 
 University College, London. 8vo, with Engravings, 158. 
 
 By the same Author. 
 
 Elementary Systematic Chemistry for the Use 
 
 of Schools and Colleges. With Engravings. Crown Svo, -is. 6d. ; 
 Interleaved, .5s. Gd. 
 
 Valentin's Practical Chemistry and Qualitative 
 
 and Quantitative Analysis. Edited by Dr. W. K. Hodgkinson, 
 F.ll.S.E., Professor of Chemistry and Ph3^8ics at the Royal Military 
 Academy, and Artillery College, Woolwich. Ninth Edition. 8vo, with 
 Engrax-tngs and Map of Spectra. 9s. (The Tal)los separately, 2s. (d.) 
 
 Practical Chemistry, Part I. Qualitative Exer- 
 cises and Analytical Tables for Students. By J. Campbell Browx, 
 Professor of Chemistry in Victoria University and University College, 
 Liverpool. Fourth Edition. Svo, 2s. 6d. 
 
 The Analyst's Laboratory Companion : a Col- 
 lection of Tal)les and Data for Chemists and Students. By Alfred 
 E. JOHN.SON, A.R.C.S.I., F.LC. Second Edition. Crown 8vo, cloth, 
 5s. ; leather, Gs. M, 
 
 Commercial Organic Analysis : a Treatise on 
 
 the Properties, Modes of Assaying, Proximate Analytical Examination, 
 etc., of the various Organic Chemicals and Products employed in the 
 Arts, Manufactures, Medicine, etc. By Alfred H. Allen, F.LC. 
 
 Third Edition. 
 Vol. I., 18s. ; Vol. IL, Part I., Us. 
 
 Second Edition. 
 Vol. III., Pt. IL, 18s.; Vol. III., Pt. III., 18s. ; 
 
 Vol. IV., completing the work, ISs. 
 
 Volumetric Analysis (A Systematic Hand- 
 book of) ; or the Quantitative Estimation of Chemical Substances by 
 Meivsure, applied to Liquids, Solids, and Gases. By Francis Sutton, 
 F.C.S., F.I.C, Public Analyst for the County of Norfolk. Seventh 
 Edition. Svo, with 112 Engravings, 18s. 6d. 
 
 7, GREAT MARLBOROUGH STREET. 
 
J. ^ A. Churchill's Recent TForJcd. 
 
 Chemical Technology: or, Chemistry in its 
 
 Applications to Arts and Manufactures. Edited by Chahles E. 
 Groves, F.K.S., and Wilmam Thoup, B.Sc. 
 
 7oL. I.— Fuel and its Applications. By E.J. 
 
 Mills, D.Sc, F.R.S., and F. J. liowAy, C.E. lloyal 8vo, with 
 t)06 Engravings, 30s. 
 
 Vol. II.— Lighting, Fats and Oils, by W. Y. 
 
 Dent. Stearine Industky, by J. McAhthuk. Candi.k Manu- 
 facture, by L. FIELD an.l F. A. Field. The Petuolkl-m 
 
 IXDUSTKY AND LAMPS, by BoVEKTON UeDWOOD. MINEKS SAIEIY 
 
 Lamps, by B. Kedwood and D. A. Louis. Koyal 8vo. with 358 
 Engravings and Map, 20s. 
 
 Cooley's Cyclopaedia of Practical Receipts, 
 
 and Collateral Information in the Arts, Manufactures, Professions, 
 and Trades : including Medicine, Pharmacy, Hygiene, and Domestic 
 Economy. Seventh Edition, by W. North, M.A. Camb., F.C.b. 
 2 Vols., Hoy. 8vo, with 371 Engravings, 42s. 
 
 Chemical Technology : a Manual. By Rudolf 
 
 VON WAGNER. Translated and Edited by Sir William Crookes 
 F R S from the Thirteenth Enlarged German Edition as remodelled 
 by Dr' Ferdinand Fischer. 8vo, with 596 Engravings, 32s. 
 
 Technological Handbooks. Edited by John 
 
 Gardner, F.LC, F.C.S., and James Cameron. F.LC. 
 
 Brewing, Distilling, and Wme Manu- 
 facture. Crown 8vo, with Engravings, Cs. Cd. 
 
 Bleaching, Dyeing, and Calico Pnntmg. 
 
 With Formulae. Crown 8vo, with Engravnigs, os. 
 
 Oils, Resins, and Varnishes. Crown bvo, 
 
 with Engravings, 7s. 6d. ..i kj t? 
 
 Soaps and Candles. Crown 8vo, with 54 l^n- 
 MethodsTnd Formulae used in the Preparation 
 
 of Animal and Vegetable Tissues for Microscopiail Ex.innnation in- 
 cluding the Staining of Bacteria. By Pktkr Wyatt S^^uire, KL.S. 
 Crown 8vo, 3s. 6d. . , c? • 
 
 The Quarterly Tournalof Microscopical Science. 
 
 Edited by E. Kav Lankestkr, M.A., LL.D., ^'l^^^- =-'/'' ^J^LiT 
 operation of Adam Sedgwick. M.A., F.11.S.. and W. F. U. Weldon. 
 M.A., F.K.S. Bach Number, lOff. 
 
 7, GMEAT MARLBOROUGH STREET. 
 
J. 8f A. ChurchilVs Recent Works, 
 
 The Microscope and its Revelations. By the 
 
 late WlLUAM B. Cakpkntku, C.B., M.I)., LL.U., F.K.S. Seventh 
 K.lition, by tlie Kev. W. H. Dallingkk, LL.U., F.K.S. With 21 
 
 Pliites and 800 Wooti Kiigraviugs. »vo, 2t33. Half Calf, ."iOs. 
 
 The Microtomist's Vade-Mecum : a Handbook 
 
 of the Methods of Microscopic Anatomy. By Arthur Bolles Lee. 
 Fourth Edition, 8vo, ITis. 
 
 Photo-Micrography (Guide to the Science of). 
 
 By Edward C. Bousfield, L.R.C.P. Lond. 8vo, with 34 Engravings 
 and Frontispiece, 6s. 
 
 An Introduction to Physical Measurements, 
 
 with Appendices on Absolute Electrical Measurements, etc. By Dr. 
 F. KoHLRAUSCH, Professor at the University of Strassburg. Third 
 Edition, translated from the seventh German edition, by Thomas 
 Hutchinson Wallkk, B.A., B.Sc, and Henry Richardson Procter, 
 F.LC, F.C.S. 8vo, with 91 Illustrations, 12s. 6d. 
 
 Tuson's Veterinary Pharmacopoeia, including 
 
 the Outlines of Materia Medica and Therapeutics. Fifth Edition 
 Edited by James Bayne, F.C.S., Professor of Chemistry and 
 Toxicology in the Royal Veterinary College. Crown Svo, 7s. 6d. 
 
 The Veterinarian's Pocket Remembrancer : 
 
 being Concise Directions for the Treatment of Urgent or Rare Cases, 
 embracing Semeiology, Diagnosis, Prognosis, Surgery, Therapeutics, 
 Toxicology, Detection of Poisons by their Appropriate Tests, Hygiene, 
 etc. By Geokge Armatage, M.R.C.V.S. Second Edition, Post 
 Svo, 3s. 
 
 Chauveau's Comparative Anatomy of the 
 
 Domesticated Animals. Revised and Enlarged, with the Co-operation 
 of S. Arloing, Director of the Lyons Veterinary School, and Edited 
 by George Fleming, C.B., LL.D., F.R.C.V.S., late Principal Veteri- 
 nary Surgeon of the British Army. Second English Edition. Svo, 
 with .585 Engravings, 31s. 6d. 
 
 Human Nature, its Principles and the Principles 
 
 of Physiognomy. By Physicist. Part I., Imp. l(3mo, 2s. 
 
 The Brain-Machine, its Power and Weakness. 
 
 By Albert Wilson, M.D. Edin, With 37 Illustrations, Svo, 4s. 6d. 
 
 7, GREAT MARLBOROUGH STREET. 
 
 23 
 
Index "TO J. & A. Churchill's Cataloouk. 
 
 Allen's Chemistry of Urine, 22 
 
 Commercial Orfjanic Analy- 
 sis, 26 
 
 Anderson on Fingers ami Toes, IS 
 Armalatje's Vetei iiiiuy J'ocl<et Re- 
 membrancer, 2S 
 Barnes' (R.) Obstetric Operations, (i 
 
 Diseases of Women, (5 
 
 Beale (L. S.) on Livf^r, 12 
 
 Microscope in Medicine, 12 
 
 Sliglit Ailments, 12 
 
 Urinary and Renal Derange- 
 ments, 22 
 
 Beale (P. T. B.) on Elementary 
 
 Biology, 3 
 Beasley's Book of Prescriptions, 8 
 
 Druggists' General Receipt 
 
 Book, s 
 
 Pharmaceutical Formu- 
 
 lary, 8 
 Bell on"SteriIity, 6 
 Bellamy's Surgical Anatomy, 2 
 Bentley and Trimen's Medicinal 
 
 Plants, 9 
 Bentley's Systematic Botany, 9 
 Berkart's Bronchial Asthma, 13 
 Bernard on Stammering, 14 
 Bigg's Short Manual of Orthopaedy, 
 
 18 
 Bloxam's Chemistry, 25 
 
 Laboratory Teaching, 2o 
 
 Bousfield's Photo-Micrography, 28 
 Bowlby's Injuries and Diseases of 
 
 Nerves, 17 
 
 Surgical Pathology and 
 
 Morbid Anatomy, 17 
 Broekbank on Gallstones, 15 
 Brodburst's Anchylosis, 17 
 
 ■ -Curvatures of Spine, 17 
 
 Dislocation of Ifip, 17 
 
 TalipesEquino-Varus,17 
 
 Brown's Midwifeiy, ti 
 
 Brown's Practical Clieniistry, 2<5 
 
 Bryant's Practice of Surgery, 17 
 
 Bu'kley on Skin, 21 
 
 Burckhardt and Fenwick's Atlas of 
 
 Electric Cystiiscopy, 22 
 Burdett's Hospitals and Asylums of 
 
 the World, 4 
 Butler-Smythe's Ovariotomies, 6 
 Butlin's Malignant Disease of the 
 
 Larynx, 21 
 Operative Surgery of Malig- 
 nant Disease, 21 
 
 Butlin's Sarcoma and Carcinoma, 21 
 Buzzard's Diseases of the Nervous 
 System, 14 
 
 Peripheral Neuritis, 14 
 
 Simulation of Hj-steria, 
 
 14 
 Cameron's Oils, Resins, and Var- 
 nishes, 27 
 
 Soaps and Cantlles, 27 
 
 Carpent-er ami Daliinger on the Mi- 
 croscope, 2K 
 Carpenter's Ilunian Physiology, .'J 
 Cautley on Feeding Infants, 7 
 Charteris' Practice of Medicine, 11 
 Chauveau's Comparative Anatomy, 
 
 28 
 Chevers' Diseases of India, 10 
 Churchill's Face and Foot Deformi- 
 ties, 18 
 Clarke's Eyestrain, 19 
 Clouston's Lectures on Mental 
 
 Diseases, 4 
 Clowes and Coleman's Quantitative 
 
 Analysis, 25 
 Clowes and Coleman's Elementary 
 
 Practical Chemistry, 25 
 Clowes' Practical Chemistry, 25 
 Coles on Blood, 12 
 Cooley's Cj'clopsedia of Practical 
 
 Receipts, 27 
 Cooper's Syphilis, 2.3 
 Cooper and Edwards' Diseases of the 
 
 Rectum, 21 
 Cripps' (H.) Ovariot^imy and Ab- 
 dominal Surgery, 17 
 
 Diseases of the Rectum 
 
 and Anus, 24 
 
 Cancer of Rectum, 21 
 
 Air and Fa'cesin Urethra, 
 
 24 
 Cripps' (R. A.) Galenic Pharmacy, 8 
 Cuff s Lectures to Nurses, 7 
 Cullingworth's Manual of Nursing,? 
 
 Monthly Nurses, 7 
 
 Dalby's Diseases and Injuries of the 
 Ear, 20 
 
 Short Ccmtributions, 20 
 
 Dana on Nervous Diseases, I I 
 Day on Diseases of Children, 7 
 
 on Headivches, 15 
 
 Domville's Manual for Nurses, 7 
 Doran's Gyna^cologicjil Oin-rations, 6 
 Druitt's Surgeon's Vade-Meeiini, 17 
 Duncan (A.) on Prevention of Dis- 
 ejises in Tropics, 10 
 
 [Vimthiued on next pape. 
 
 7, GREAT MARLBOROUGH STREET, 
 
IHSKX TO J. ft A. OHUKOHTLL'S OATi-LOOUK— COntiniMt/. 
 
 Bllis's (T. S.) Human Foot, IS 
 
 Fiijjjjp's Principles and Practice of 
 Medicine, 10 
 
 Fay rer'6 Climate and Fevers of India, 
 10 
 
 Natural History, etc., of 
 
 Cholera, 10 
 
 Fenwick (E. H.). Kleetric Illumina- 
 tion of Blad(l<!r, 22 
 
 Symptoms of Urinary Dis- 
 
 ease, 22 
 
 Tumours of Bladder, 22 
 
 Fenwick's (S.) Medical Diafjnosis, 12 
 Obscure Diseases of the 
 
 Abdomen, 12 
 Outlines of Medical Treat- 
 ment, 12 
 
 The Saliva as a Test, 12 
 
 Fink's Operating for Cataract, 19 
 Flower's Diagrams of the Nerves, 2 
 Fowler's Dictionary of Practical 
 
 Medicine, 11 
 Fox (G. H.) on Skin Diseases of 
 
 Children, 21 
 Fox (Wilson), Atlas of Pathological 
 
 Anatomy of the Lvmgs, 11 
 Treatise on Diseases of the 
 
 Lungs, 11 
 Frankland and Japp's Inorganic 
 
 Chemistrj', 26 
 Fi-aser's Operations on the Brain, 16 
 Presenilis' Qualitative Analysis, 2o 
 
 Quantitative Anal3'sis, 25 
 
 Qalabin's Diseases of Women, 6 
 
 Manual of Midwifery, 5 
 
 Gardner's Bleaching, Dj'^eing, and 
 
 Calico Printing, 27 
 
 Brewing, Distilling, and 
 
 Wine Manufacture, 27 
 Gimlette's M^^xoedema, 12 
 Glassington's Dental Materia Medi- 
 
 ca, 20 
 Godlee's Atlas of Human Anatomy, 
 
 1 
 Goodhart's Diseases of Children, 7 
 Gowers' Diagnos is of Brain Disease, 
 
 18 
 Diseases of Nervous Sys- 
 tem, r.i 
 Medical Ophthalmoscopy, 13 
 
 Sj'philis and the Nervous 
 
 System, 13 
 Granville on Gout, 14 
 Green's Manual of Botany, 9 
 Groves and Thorp's Chemical Tech- 
 nology, 27 
 
 Guys Hospital Reports, 11 
 Habershon's Diseases of the Abdo- 
 men, 15 
 Haig's Uric Acid, 13 
 
 Diet and Food, 4 
 
 Harlev on Diseases of the Liver, 14 
 Harris's (V. D.) Diseases of Chest, 11 
 Harrison's Urinary Organs, 23 
 Hartridge's Kefraction of the Eye, 19 
 
 0}>htlialmoseope, 19 
 
 Hawthorne's Galenical Prepara- 
 tions, 8 
 Heath's Certain Diseases of the 
 Jaws, 16 
 
 Clinical Lectures on Sur- 
 
 gical Subjects, 16 
 
 Injuries and Diseases of the 
 
 Jaws, 16 
 
 Minor Surgery and Ban 
 
 daging, 16 
 
 Operative Surgery, 16 
 
 Practical Anatomy', 1 
 
 Surgical Diagnosis, 16 
 
 Hellier's Notes on Gynaecologica 
 
 Nursing, 7 
 Hewlett's Bacteriology, 4 
 Higgens' Ophthalmic Out-patient 
 
 Practice, 19 
 Hill on Cerebral Circulation, 2 
 Hillis' Leprosy in British Guiana, 20 
 Hirschfeld's Atlas of Central Ner- 
 vous System, 2 
 Holden's Human Osteology, I 
 
 Landmarks, 1 
 
 Holthouse on Stral)ismus, IS 
 Hooper's Phj^sicians' Yade Mecnm , 
 
 10 
 Hovell's Diseases of the Ear, 20 
 Human Nature and Phj'siognomy, 
 
 28 
 Hyde's Diseases of the Skin, 21 
 Hj'slop's Mental Physiology, 5 
 Impey on Leprosy, 21 
 Ireland's Mental Affections of 
 
 Children, 5 
 Jacobson's Male Organs, 22 
 
 Operations of Surgery, 17 
 
 Jellett's Midwifery 5 
 
 Jessop's Ophthalmic Surgery and 
 
 Medicine. IH 
 Johnsons (Sir G.) Asphyxia, 12 
 Medical Lectures and Es- 
 says, 12 
 Cholera Controversy, 12 
 
 (A. E.) Analyst's Com- 
 
 panion, 26 
 
 {Continued on next page. 
 
 7, GREAT MARLBOROUGH STREET, 
 
INDKX TO J. & A. Ohitbchiix's AT AijOQiTa— Continued. 
 
 Journal of Mental Science, 5 
 Kello}ij{ on Mental Diseases, 5 
 Kt^es' Cienito-Urinary Orjjans and 
 
 Syjihilis, 2."i 
 Kohlruuschs Physical Measure- 
 ments, 2.S 
 Lane's Kheumatio Diseases, 14 
 Lanj^don Dcnvn's Mental Affections 
 
 ol" Chil(iho<Hl, T 
 Laiarus Barlow's General Patho- 
 logy, 2 
 Lee's Microt-omists' Vade-Mecum, 28 
 Lescher's liecent Materia Med lea, 9 
 Lewis (Be van) on the Human Brain, 2 
 Liebreieh's Atlas of Ophthalmo- 
 
 soopy, 19 
 Lucas's Practical Pharmacy, 8 
 MacMunn's Clinical Chemistry of 
 
 Urine, 22 
 Macnamara's Diseases and Refrac- 
 tion of the Bye, 18 
 
 Diseases of Bones and 
 
 Joints, 17 
 McNeill's Isolation Hospitals, 4 
 Malcolm's Physiology of Death, 16 
 Marcet on Respiration, 3 
 Martin's Ambulance Lectures, lo 
 Maxwell's Terminologia Medica 
 
 Polyglotta, 24 
 Maylard's Surgery of Alimentary 
 
 Canal, 16 
 Mayne's Medical Vocabulary, 24 
 Microscopical Journal, 27 
 Mills and Rowan's Fuel and its 
 
 Applications, 27 
 Moore's (N.) Pathological Anatomy 
 
 of Diseases, 2 
 Moore's(SirW. JODiseases of India.lO 
 
 Family Medicine, etc., tor 
 
 India, 10 
 Morris's Human Anatomy, 1 
 
 Anatomy of Joints, 2 
 
 Moullin's (Mansell) Surgeiy, 16 
 Nettk'ship's Diseases of the Eye, 18 
 Notter and Firth's Hygiene, 3 
 Ogle on Tympanites, 15 
 Oliver's Abdominal Tumours, 6 
 
 Diseases of Women, 6 
 
 Ophthalmic (Royal London) Hospital 
 
 Jteports, 18 
 Ophthalmological Society's Ti-ans- 
 
 actions, 18 
 Ormerod's Diseases of the Nervous 
 
 System, 13 
 Owen's (J.) Diseases of Women, 6 
 
 ical Hygiene, .' 
 Parkcs' (L. C.) Elements oi" Health, I 
 Pavy's Carl lohy.i rates, 12 
 Pereira's Seieeta 6 Prescriptis, 8 
 Phillips' Mat-eria Medica and Thom- 
 
 peutics, 8 
 Pitt-Lewis's Insane and t.h(! Law, 4 
 Pollock's Histology of the Ey<' and 
 
 Eyeliils, 19 
 Proctor 8 Practical Pharmacy, 8 
 Puroell on Cancer, 22 
 Pye-Smith's Diseases of the Skin, 21 
 Ramsay's Elementary Syst^imal ic 
 Chemistry, 2») 
 
 Inorganic Chemistry, 26 
 
 Richardson's Mechanical Dentistry. 
 
 20 
 Richmond on Antiseptics, 7 
 Roberts' (D. Lloyd), Practice of Mid- 
 wifery, .5 
 Robinson s (Tom) Eczema, 31 
 Illustrations of Skin Dis- 
 eases, 21 
 
 Syphilis, 21 
 
 Ross's Aphasia, 14 
 
 Diseases of the Nervous Sys- 
 tem, 14 
 Royleand Harley's Materia Medica, 9 
 St. Thomas's Hospital Reports, 11 
 Sansom's Valvular Disease of the 
 
 Heart, 13 
 Shaw's Diseases of the Eye, 19 
 Shaw-Mackenzie ou Maternal Sy- 
 philis, 24 
 Short Dictionary of Medical Terms, 
 
 24 
 Silk's Manual of Nitrous Oxide, 20 
 Smith's (Ernest), Dental Metallurgy, 
 20 
 
 (Eustace) Clinical Studies, 7 
 
 Disease in Children, 7 
 
 Wasting Diseases of Infants 
 
 and Children, 7 
 Smith's (J. Greig) Abdominal Sur- 
 gery, 16 
 Smiths (Priestley) Glaucoma, 19 
 Snow's Cancers and the Cancer 
 Process, 21 
 
 Palliative Treatment of Can- 
 
 cer, 21 
 
 Reapi^eanince of Cancer, 21 
 
 Solly's Medical Clinuitologv, 15 
 Southall's Organic Matrria Medina, 9 
 Squire's (P.) Conijtfinion to the 
 
 PharmaeoiKJuia, 8 
 [Contintud on next paye. 
 
 7, GREAT MAHLBOHOUaU STREET. 
 
IVDSZ TO J. ft A. 0HrKCHn,L'8 CATAtoouE— conttnuerf. 
 
 Squire's (P.) London Hospitals 
 PliarmucoiMiiivs, .S 
 
 Methods and l-'ormuL-r. 27 
 
 Starlinjj's Klt-nK-nts of Human IMiy- 
 
 siolofiV. "^ 
 SternlKTji's Bartciiolony, 11 
 Stevenson and Murphy's Hyfricne, 4 
 Sutton's (F.) Volumetric Analysis, 2(i 
 Sutton's (J. B.) General Pathology, 2 
 Swain's Surfjical Emerjiencies, In 
 Swayne's ()l)st<'tric Aphorisms, 6 
 Taylor's (A. S.) Medical Jurispru- 
 dence, 'i 
 Taylor's (F.) Practice of Medicine, 10 
 Thin's Cancerous Affections of the 
 Skin, 22 
 
 Pathology and Treatment of 
 
 Ringworm, 22 
 
 Psilosis or " Sprue," 10 
 
 Thomas's Diseases of Women, 6 
 Thompson's (Sir H.) Calculous Dis- 
 eases, 23 
 
 ■ Diseases of the Urinary 
 
 Organs, 23 
 Introduction to Cata- 
 logue, 23 
 
 Lithotomy and Litho- 
 
 trity, 23 
 Stricture of the Ure- 
 thra, 23 
 
 — Suprapuhic Operation, 
 
 23 
 
 Surgery of the Urinary 
 
 Organs, 23 
 
 Tumours of the Bladder, 
 
 23 
 Thome's Diseases of the Heart, 11 
 Thresh on Water Analysis, 4 
 Tilden's Chemistry, 25 
 
 Tobin's Synopsis of Surgery, I'l 
 Tomes' (C. S.) Dental Anat<)my, 20 
 
 (J. & C. S.)DentAlSurgery,20 
 
 Tooth's Spinal Coni, 14 
 
 Treves and Lang's German-English 
 
 Dictionary, 24 
 Tuke'B Dictionary of Psychological 
 
 Medicine, 5 
 Tuson's Veterinary Pharmacopoeia, 
 
 28 
 Valentin and Hodgkinson's Practical 
 
 Chemistry, 2*5 
 Vintras on the Mineral Waters, etc, , 
 
 of France, 15 
 Wagner's Chemical Technology, 27 
 Walsham's Surgery : its Theory and 
 
 Practice, 15 
 Waring's Indian Bazaar Medicines, 
 9 
 
 Practical Therapeutics, 9 
 
 Watts' Organic Chemistry, 25 
 West's (S.) How to Examine the 
 
 Chest, 11 
 
 Westminster Hospital Reports, 11 
 
 White's (Hale) Matenia Medica, 
 Pharmac3'^, ^*^-» 7 
 
 Wilks' Diseases of the Nervous Sys- 
 tem, 13 
 
 Wilson's (Albert) Brain-Machine, 28 
 
 Wilson's (Sir E.) Anatomist's Vade- 
 Mecum, 1 
 
 Wilson's (Gr.) Handbook of Hygiene, 
 3 
 
 Wolfe's Diseases and Injuries of the 
 Eye, 18 
 
 Wynter and Wethered's Practical 
 Pathology, 2 
 
 Year Book of Pharmacy, 9 
 
 Yeo's (G. F.) Manual of Physiology . 3 
 
 N.B.—J. & A. Churchill's larcjer Cat alogrie of about 600 ivorks on Anatomy, 
 Physiolo(iy, Ilj/f/icne, Midwifery, Materia Medica, Medicine, Surgery, 
 Chemistry, Botany, etc. etc., with a complete Index to their Subjects, for easy 
 reference, will be forwarded post free on application. 
 
 America. — J. & A. Churchill being in constant communication with various 
 publishing houses in America are able to condxict negotiations favourable to 
 English AutJiors. 
 
 LONDON: 7, GREAT MARLBOROUGH STREET, 
 
14 DAY USE 
 
 RETURN TO DESK FROM WHICH BORROWED 
 
 OPTOMETRY LIBRARY 
 
 This book is due on the last date stamped below, or 
 
 on the date to which renewed. 
 
 Renewed books are subject to immediate recall. 
 
 iy^j&^-'-)STr 
 
 - 
 
 «iM#l"f1riiiii jfiin 
 
 
 ^ '^■' X T.' T!3ty^y 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 » 
 
 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 LD 21-50m-6,'59 
 (A2845sl0)476 
 
 General Library 
 
 University of California 
 
 Berkeley